Nokia Solutions and Networks T6BS1 CDMA Base Station User Manual IHET6BS1 Part 2 of 2

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	166055
Application ID	COlrg+u8I5dH/VoNN/4YZA==
Document Description	IHET6BS1 User Manual Part 2 of 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	111.11kB (1388911 bits)
Date Submitted	2001-08-23 00:00:00
Date Available	2001-08-23 00:00:00
Creation Date	2001-08-23 16:14:55
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Document Lastmod	2001-08-23 16:15:35
Document Title	IHET6BS1 User Manual Part 2 of 2

Using CDMA LMF – continued
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the
LMF is not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Change the Multi-channel Preselector from the Multi-channel Preselector pick list (normally
MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
Use a Tower Top Amplifier is not applicable to the SC4812ET Lite.
10
Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)
NOTE
S If you attempt to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
S There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
S If the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devices
can be seen.
S If the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-23
Using CDMA LMF – continued
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
IMPORTANT
If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the
same time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login
must be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 to
start the GUI environment and log into a BTS.
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already
running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLI
session will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–
host=
port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this
is first login to this BTS)
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login
to this BTS)
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts–33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI
operating environments.
3-24
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF – continued
IMPORTANT
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and CLI
environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).
Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as
the GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system could not log out of the
BTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further
operations.
If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.
Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click
Yes in the Logout Error popup which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
S The Select menu on the BTS tab will only log you out of the displayed BTS.
S You can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection
in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up
message will appear.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-25
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=logout bts–33
13:24:51.028 Command In Progress
13:24:52.04
Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures which require MMI communication between the
CDMA LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 to
initiate the communication session.
Figure 3-11 illustrates common equipment connections for the CDMA
LMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to the
illustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMI
communication session.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which
requires the MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
. . . continued on next page
3-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from
the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is
obtained.
Figure 3-11: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
To FRU MMI port
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in CDMA LMF by clicking on
Help in the menu bar.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-27
Pinging the Processors
Pinging the BTS
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-12 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration for the SC4812ET Lite with an expansion frame. The
drawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and B LANs.
Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network
modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.
Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by Electro–Static Discharge (ESD).
Figure 3-12: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
OUT
50Ω
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812ET Lite
(MASTER)
SC4812ET Lite
(EXPANSION)
FRAME GROUND
OUT
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812ETL0013–4
3-28
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Pinging the Processors – continued
IMPORTANT
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations
must be installed on each frame/enclosure external LAN
connector before performing this test. All other processor
board LAN connections are made through the backplanes.
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI2 which has been replaced,
perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.
Be sure uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear of
frame – Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-12) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 and
Figure 3-10.)
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector. The
CDMA LMF session should remain active. Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B IN
connector.
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.
Click on OK.
If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:
Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
S If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
S If the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems would be: failure of the CDMA LMF to login, shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open
cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI2 itself.
10
Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-9, exit from the CDMA LMF program, and restart the
Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.
11
Restart the CDMA LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function, and log into the BTS as
described in Table 3-7.
12
Perform steps 6 through 9 again.
S If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is still no response,proceed to step 13.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-29
Pinging the Processors – continued
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
13
If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the CDMA LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel reset
pushbutton and perform steps 6 through 9 again.
14
NOTE
Refer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.
15
After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTS
frame LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-12). Disconnect the LMF cable
from the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) using a
BNC–female–to–BNC–female adapter (refer to Figure 3-10).
16
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.
17
Repeat steps 5 through 8 using LAN B.
18
After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination on
the frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.
19
Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A using a
BNC-female-to-BNC-female adapter.
20
Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch to
primary LAN A.
21
Repeat steps 5 through 8 to ensure proper primary LAN operation.
3-30
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS
Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the CDMA LMF is NOT
routine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is
only done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the
device does not match the release level of the site operating software
AND the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform the
download. An example would be a BTS loaded with Release 9.2
software where a GLI loaded with Release 2.8.1 ROM code must be
installed to replace a malfunctioning MGLI.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
ROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF
computer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded will change to
OOS–ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS–ROM (blue) when the
download is completed. The same Revision–level RAM code must then
be downloaded to the device. For example, if Release 2.9.2.1.1 ROM
code is downloaded, Release 2.9.2.1.1 RAM code must be downloaded.
Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix G.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that matches
the “NextLoad” parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the
code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will
change to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI
or GLI, the CDMA LMF automatically also downloads data and then
enables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS (green).
For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-31
Download the BTS – continued
RAM code downloading requires a few minutes. After the download
starts, the non–GLI device being loaded changes to OOS–ROM (blue). If
the download is completed successfully, the non–GLI device changes to
OOS–RAM (yellow).
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:
S Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2)
S Redundant GLI (GLI2)
S Clock Syncronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code must
be loaded)
S Multi Channel CDMA (MCC24 or MCC8E) card
S Broadband Transceiver (BBX2)
S RFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC), if equipped
IMPORTANT
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM
code and data, and in INS (green) status before
downloading any other device. The RAM code download
process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and
then enables the MGLI.
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Devices should not be loaded with RAM code which is for a different
system release than the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before
downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the
procedure in Table 3-13 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the
correct ROM code for the system release used by the BSS.
Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).
Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the menu bar.
In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI2.
S The system release number will be the first two decimal divisions of the number; for example, the
number 2.15.0.0.3 would be for System Release 2.15, and 2.9.2.2.34 would be for System Release
2.9.
If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not for the correct system release, log out of the BTS,
disconnect the CDMA LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7, and have the
CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.
When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the system release being used, be sure the span lines
are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data.
3-32
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS – continued
Download RAM Code and Data
to MGLI and GLI
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-14 to download the RAM code and
data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.
Prerequisites
S Prior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded.
S The CDMA LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to
Table 3-6), and is logged in using the GUI environment (refer to
Table 3-7).
Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step
Action
From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.
Select the correct code version for the system release being used and click Save.
Download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status
window. (The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)
Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and
repeating step 4.
Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
Download RAM Code and Data
to Non–GLI Devices
Downloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for each
device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAM
code and data are downloaded to non–GLI devices in separate steps.
IMPORTANT
CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software
version needs to be loaded.
NOTE
When downloading to multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). These
devices can be loaded individually after completing the
multiple download.
Follow the steps in Table 3-15 to download RAM code and data to
non–GLI devices.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-33
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
Step
Action
Select the target CSM, MCC, and BBX device(s).
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to the
OOS–RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
To download data, select the target CSM and MCC device(s).
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Data.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options.
Local GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for source 2 & 3)
LFR (only for source 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
NONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT (green), CSM= OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT
(green)
Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Clock Source menu item.
Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related
check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
. . . continued on next page
3-34
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection
action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The GPS receiver interfaced to CSM 1 is used as the primary timing
reference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides
clock syncronization back–up, but does not have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver
(LFR), a High Stability Oscillator (HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium
source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all
cases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given
time.
IMPORTANT
For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS
receiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1
slot before continuing.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the CSMs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
Table 3-17: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first.
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
S CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).
S FAIL may be shown in the status report table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown
in the Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-35
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-17: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated
by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alters satellite orbits;
therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”
that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS
receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fix
for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver
needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
NOTE
S If equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should be
dark green(INS–STB)
S If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-13 and Table 3-20 to
determine the cause.
After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to enable the MCCs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
IMPORTANT
The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,
prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.
Table 3-18: Enable MCCs
Step
Action
Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
3-36
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Clock Synchronization
Manager (CSM) System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
cards is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM card in SCCP shelf
slot CSM–1 is the primary timing source while the card in slot CSM–2
provides redundancy. The second generation CSM card (CSM2) is
required when using the remote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a
GPS receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2
card. A CSM2 card can have a local GPS receiver daughter card to
support an RF–GPS signal.
Each CSM2 card features a temperature–stablized, crystal oscillator that
provides 19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz reference
signals to the synchronization source selected from the following (refer
to Table 3-20 for source selection/verification procedures):
S GPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPS
S LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability
Oscillator (HSO)
S External reference oscillator sources
CDMA Clock Distribution Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute
even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clock signals from the CSM
cards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM–1, and CCD 2 is
married to the card in slot CSM–2.
The BTS switches between the primary and redundant units (card slots
CSM–1 and CSM–2, respectively) upon failure or command. A failure
in CSM–1 or CCD 1 will cause the system to switch to the
CSM–2–CCD 2 redundant card pair.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure in CSM–1. During normal operation, the card in
CSM–1 selects GPS as the primary timing source (Table 3-20). The
source selection can also be overridden via the CDMA LMF or by the
system software.
In addition to providing GPS synchronization to the LFR or HSO
back–up sources, synchronization between the primary and redundant
CSM–CCD pairs increases reliability.
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM performs the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN–C RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-37
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-20). HSO,
HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(Table 3-20).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM
card warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and
oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test
equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard
timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements
are made.
3-38
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock
Synchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF path
verification tests.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
1a
Action
For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primary CSM
slot, CSM–1, and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot 1.
1b
For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM2 card is installed in primary slot CSM–1 and that CSM–1 is
INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC or subsequent.
Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
card) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-13).
Reinstall CSM–2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-11) .
When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION
In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antenna
to the RF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS
antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS antenna is
inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-39
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Figure 3-13: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM card shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
GPS Initialization/Verification
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
S The CDMA LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the
primary CSM as shown in Figure 3-13.
S A HyperTerminal session has been started (Table 3-11), and the CSM>
prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window (Table 3-19).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify proper
GPS receiver functioning.
3-40
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– The system will display a response similiar to the following:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPS
receivers:
sources
– When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed–out*
Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid source
by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-41
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage
3-42
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-43
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
10
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3-44
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
LORAN–C
Initialization/Verification
Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB –6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB –4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-45
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
–3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
LFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 2
LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
3-46
Close the hyperterminal window.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Setup
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIB
bus. The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly as follows:
S Power meter address should be 13
S Communications test set should be 18
The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,
calibration and ATP tests:
S CDMA LMF
S Communications test set model supported by the CDMA LMF
S Power meter model supported by the CDMA LMF (required when
using the HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 test sets)
S Non–radiating transmit line termination load
S Directional coupler and in–line attenuator
S RF cables and adapters
Refer to Table 3-22 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by the CDMA LMF. In addition, see the following
figures:
S Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration
S Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests
Supported Test Equipment
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using the following test
equipment:
CyberTest
Advantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
Hewlett–Packard HP 8935
Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz))
and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
S Rubidium Standard Timebase – optional
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX)
test connections must be through a 30 dB directional
coupler plus a 20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800
MHz and 1.9 GHz BTSs.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-47
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Test Equipment Preparation
For specific steps to prepare each type of test set and power meter to
perform calibration and ATP, see Appendix F.
Test Equipment Connection
Chart
Table 3-22 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
3-48
Cyber–
Test
Advantest
EVEN
EVEN SEC
SEC REF SYNC IN
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
HP
8935
HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EXT
REF IN
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Directional
Coupler & Pad*
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
CDMA
TIME BASE TIME BASE
IN
IN
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–IB
HP–IB
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50–OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF IN/
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
20 DB
PAD
BTS
PORT
TX1–6
RX1–12
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Equipment Warm-up
IMPORTANT
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Automatic Cable Calibration
Set–up
Figure 3-14 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test. Table 3-26 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-49
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUT
50–OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
INPUT
50–OHM
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
TX
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TEST
SET
TX
CABLE
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
FW00089
3-50
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Manual Cable Calibration
If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in
Appendix F.
Set–up for TX Calibration
Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
Ì
FRONT PANEL
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
OUT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
ΤERM.
RF
IN/OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
TX
TEST
CABLE
IN
TX TEST
2O DB
CABLE
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
GPIB
CABLE
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
** BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
SETTINGS**
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
LAN
G MODE
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00094
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-51
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
CANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. A
POWER METER MUST BE USED.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
POWER METER
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
ΤERM.
TX
TEST
CABLE
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA GROUP
OR TX RFDS DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
S MODE
SETTINGS*
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
BTS
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00095
3-52
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR.
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF
OUT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
50 Ω
ΤERM.
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
Advantest Model R3465
SYNC MONITOR EVEN
SEC TICK PULSE
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
IN
RF
IN/OUT
DUPLEX OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB ADRS
CSM
BNC
“T”
LAN
RF OUT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT
50–OHM
TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR
ON REAR OF TEST SET
(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3)
08/01/2001
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00096
PRELIMINARY 3-53
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-18: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR.
OUT
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
50 Ω
ΤERM.
RF
IN/OUT
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF OUT
ONLY
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
FREQ
MONITOR
RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
BTS
RF
IN/OUT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
3-54
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment set–up ensures that all measurements are correct
and the test equipment and associated test cables do not introduce
measurement errors.
NOTE
If the test equipment set (see Chapter 1, Terms and
Abbreviations) being used to interface with the BTS has
been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does
not need to be performed.
This procedure must be performed before the optimization. Verify all test
equipment (including all associated test cables and adapters actually used
to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has been calibrated and
maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set has been
replaced, the set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can
introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
Motorola recommends repeating cable calibration before
testing at each BTS site.
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose
These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine
used to determine the path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna
switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set. After
calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement
offset file on the CDMA LMF.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-55
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest
R3465 communications test sets are provided in Appendix F, if needed.
Manual power meter calibration procedures are also included in
Appendix F.
Selecting Test Equipment
Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF
computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab
is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a
network connection.
Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test
equipment:
S Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
S Test equipment GPIB addresses have been verified as correct.
S CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Selecting Test Equipment
Use Options > LMF Options in the menu bar to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Options
window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Addresses are:
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
. . . continued on next page
3-56
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.)
NOTE
With manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with CDMA LMF.
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the
CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually
communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24
to use the auto-detect feature.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step
Action
In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Options
window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
* IMPORTANT
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in the
GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the
test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is not
selected.
Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will appear
in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-57
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected (for example, an HP
437 and an HP8921A/600), only the power meter is zeroed.
Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate
test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment
must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow
the instructions provided.
Follow the direction provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables – Overview
The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the
TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is
used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable
configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration
consists of the following steps.
S Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only
for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX
cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the
analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
S The short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. The
RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with
type–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port
the test equipment. For BTSs with antenna ports carrying duplexed TX
and RX, a directional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an
additional attenuator are also used on the RX cable configuration and
must be included in the measurement.
S The short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. The
TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss
3-58
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is different
in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TX
cable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to
calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type
or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must
be used (refer to Table 3-27 and Table 3-28). Cable
calibration values must be manually entered if the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For the
HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.
The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-14
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.
Table 3-26: Cable Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a
comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX
calibration.
Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration
picklist.
Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed
with the results of the cable calibration.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-59
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the TX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-19 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for North
American cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-19, “A”) and record the value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the
diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North American
cellular and 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.
Calibration factor = A – B Example:
Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use
the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION
TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX
PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
(1.9 GHZ ONLY)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE
POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION
AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX
ATP TESTS.
3-60
Signal
Generator
SECOND RF
TEST CABLE.
FW00293
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20, if required.
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for North
American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, “A”) and record the value
for “A”.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band
for North American PCS). Record the value at point ‘‘B”.
* IMPORTANT
When preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the cable calibration setup must include
the 30 dB directional coupler and 20 dB in–line attenuator as in the TX cable calibration shown in
Figure 3-19.
Calibration factor = A – B
Example:
Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to
ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT
PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
Spectrum
Analyzer
IMPORTANT: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTS
TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA GROUP AND
MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-19.
08/01/2001
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
PRELIMINARY 3-61
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing automatic cable calibration with use of
the applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable
loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
CAUTION
Cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMF
database if manual cable calibration was performed.
Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration
and reduced site performance.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
S If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-62
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
S The In–Service Calibration check box in the Options > LMF Options > BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit
functions.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-63
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration identifies the accumulated gain in
every transmit path (BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in
the CDMA LMF CAL file. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to
each BBX2.
Each transmit path starts at an SCCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travels
through the CIO card, trunking module, LPA, trunking module (again),
TX filter or TX filter combiner, DRDC or TRDC, and ends at a BTS TX
antenna port.
Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port, travels through a
DRDC or TRDC, the MPC card, the CIO card, and terminates at a
backplane BBX2 slot.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path ( by
BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. When
the TX path calibration is performed, the RX path BLO will
automatically be set to the default value.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.
The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once
each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all
associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or
associated interconnecting RF cabling:
3-64
BBX2 board
SCCP shelf
CIO card
CIO–to–LPA trunking module RF cable
LPA trunking module
LPA
Trunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cable
TX filter or TX filter combiner
TX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cable
DRDC or TRDC
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
IMPORTANT
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX2 TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX2 slots not currently
equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).
RX Path Calibration
RX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTS
systems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibration
data files during the TX calibration routine. Functionality is verified
during Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-65
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the CDMA LMF creates a calibration
(CAL) data file where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been
completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBX2s using the
CDMA LMF Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is
shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing
out a copy of a bts.cal file and referring to it for the
following descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per–slot basis (a
slot Block).
The Slot 1 Block contains the calibration data for the six BBX2 slots.
The Slot 20 Block contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2
(see Table 3-32). Each BBX2 slot Block header contains:
S A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
S The number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file – plus the slot Block format.
Within the slot Block body, the BBX2 calibration data (BayLevelCal) is
organized as a large flat array. The array is organized by branch, BBX2
SCCP cage slot, and calibration point.
S The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the contained
calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main receive, and
diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments
3-66
Range
Branch Assignment
C[1]–C[120]
Transmit
C[121]–C[240]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
C[241]–C[360]
Receive
C[361]–C[480]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
C[481]–C[600]
Diversity Receive
C[601]–C[720]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
S The second breakdown of the array is by BBX by sector. Three sectors
are allowed.
Table 3-32: SC4812ET Lite BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX2
Sectorization
TX Branch
RX Branch
RX Diversity
Branch
Slot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 6)
1 (Omni)
3–Sector,
1st Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812ET Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power set level.)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–R1)
1 (Omni)
3–Sector,
1st Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812ET Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power set level.)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
S Refer to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32. It can be seen that
there is one BBX2 slot per sector, and 10 calibration points for each
BBX2 (sector) are supported for each branch. Each “calibration point”
consists of two entries.
S The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies the
CDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second
calibration point entry (all even entries) is the power set level
(PwrLvlAdj). The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to 27500
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-67
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
(2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500 corresponds to +125
dBm).
S The 10 calibration points for each slot/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequency
calibrated is written into the remainder of the 10 points for that
slot/branch.
Example:
C[1]=384
(odd cal entry)
C[2]=19102
= 1 “calibration point”
(even cal entry)
C[3]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[4]=19086
(even cal entry)
C[19]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[20]=19086
(even cal entry)
In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies
(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).
The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (777) will be
written to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined by
entries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX2–1.
S When BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs, the data is downloaded
to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TxCal data
(C[1] – C[60]) is sent first. BBX2 slot 1’s 10 calibration points (C[1]
– C[20]) are sent initially, followed by BBX2 slot 2’s 10 calibration
points (C[21] – C[40]), and so on. The RxCal data is sent next,
followed by the RxDCal data.
S Temperature compensation data (TempLevelCal) is also stored in the
CAL file for each slot Block.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed to
Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)
Step
3-68
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.
If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900
MHz.
For TX path calibration, verify that the coaxial cable from the appropriate ANTENNA connector
(Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7) is connected to the test equipment RF input port via the directional
coupler.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TX
ports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. Each
BBX2 at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specified
respectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIER
parameter in each BBX2’s CDF file block. The channel frequency and
desired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in the
ChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for the
CARRIER to which the BBX2 is assigned.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the measured power to
within +0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the
error is less than +1.5 dB.
The TX BLO for the SC4812ET Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.
BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX2
and the measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting the
known BBX2 power output from the power measured at the TX port or
(Measured Power) – (BBX2 TX Power Output).
Example:
Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBm
Known BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBm
BLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gain
The CDMA LMF Tests menu list items TX Calibration and All
Cal/Audit perform TX BLO Calibration testing for installed BBX(s).
The All Cal/Audit menu item initiates a series of actions to perform TX
calibration, download BLO, and perform TX audit if the TX calibration
passes. The TX Calibration selection performs only the TX calibration.
When the TX Calibration selection is used, BLO download and TX
audit must be performed as separate activities. All measurements are
made through the appropriate antenna connector using the calibrated TX
cable setup.
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-69
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit > TX
Coupler Loss... function.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
S CSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and data
load.
S Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
S All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16
and follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration
test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
3-70
Verify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned have
been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2
boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-34: All Cal/Audit Path Calibration
Step
Action
Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.
Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results will be displayed in the status report window.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
TX Calibration Test
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S MGLI and primary CSM and BDC are INS_ACT (CSM clock valid)
S All BBXs are OOS–RAM (yellow)
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration
S LMF is logged in to the BTS in the GUI environment
IMPORTANT
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards
moved since being downloaded will have to be
downloaded with code and data again.
If just a TX calibration must be run by itself, follow the procedures in
Table 3-35.
Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test
Step
Action
Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.
Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list (press and hold the Shift
or Ctrl keyboard key to select multiple items).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-71
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test
Step
Action
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results will be displayed in the
status report window.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX2 devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
S BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
S TX calibration successfully completed
After a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure in
Table 3-35, follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to
the BBX2s.
3-72
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-36: Download BLO
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure
measures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.
In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or
failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
IMPORTANT
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBX2s must have been successfully
completed prior to performing the calibration audit.
Transmit (TX) Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2
slots, per the steps in Table 3-37.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-73
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
S CSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.
S Primary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
S All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
After a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure in
Table 3-35, or if verification of BLO data in the CAL file is required,
connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-37: TX Path Audit
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3-74
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
S The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
CAUTION
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.
To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of the
BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use the
Create Cal File function the edited information will be lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S BBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-38: Create CAL File
Step
Action
Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window displays the results of the action.
Click OK.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-75
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
RFDS Setup and Calibration
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the
CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:
S Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
S FWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
S Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS
User’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function.
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
S RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
S TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
S MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(SC9600 internal RFDS only)
S Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
S TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file
to verify, view, or modify data.
3-76
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI based
RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC–R and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayed
showing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC
and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
Status the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-77
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The NAM (number assignment module) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.
The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the
TODN is the number the subscriber calls.
3-78
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
Access Overload Code
15
Slot Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary Channel A
25
1175
Primary Channel B
25
1175
Secondary Channel A
25
1175
Secondary Channel B
25
1175
Lock Code
999
Security Code
999999
Service Level
Station Class Mark
255
IMSI 11 12
99
IMSI MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
MIN Phone Number
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-79
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if a RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Antenna Map > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util > Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-80
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
S Logged into the BTS
IMPORTANT
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > RFDS Configuration > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util > Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-81
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
CDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between the
RFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR is
the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lower
third and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listed
in Table 3-44.
Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
System
Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B)
341 and 682
1.9 GHz
408 and 791
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Prerequisites
S BBX2s are INS_TEST
S Cable calibration has been performed
S TX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for
the BTS
S Test equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration
S Test equipment has been selected and calibrated
3-82
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Click on the RFDS menu.
Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item.
Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list.
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with a
comma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for
through).
Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple
carriers).
Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.
Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
11
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up
window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the status
report window.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
12
Click on the BTS tab.
13
Click on the MGLI.
14
Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device
by clicking on Device > Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.
10
NOTE
The MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-83
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
S MGLI is INS.
S TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the TSU tab.
Click on the TSU menu.
Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3-84
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
SC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.
The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the
active MGLI2.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util > Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included.
S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,
Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.
To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button
and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press
the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of
selections) while clicking on the desired levels.
S The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
S The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
S The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-85
Alarms Testing – continued
Alarm Testing Set–up
Prepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.
Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.
Click on Util in the menu bar and select Alarm Monitor... from the pulldown.
S An Alarm Monitor window will open.
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test
Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.
Table 3-48: Heat Exchanger Alarm
Step
Action
Set one of the two DC PDA heat exchanger circuit breakers to OFF. This will generate a heat
exchanger alarm. Be sure that the CDMA LMF reports the correct alarm condition.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #14, BTS Relay #15, BTS Relay #16, BTS Relay
#17, BTS Relay #18, with Contact Alarm Open*Clear*, respectively.
Set the circuit breaker turned off in step 1 to ON. Ensure that the alarm conditions have cleared on
the CDMA LMF with Contact Alarm Closed*Clear* for each reported BTS relay.
NOTE
The heat exchanger will go through the start–up sequence.
Door Alarm
Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
Table 3-49: ACLC and Power Entry Door Alarm
Step
Action
Close the ACLC and power entry compartment doors on the frame. Ensure that no alarms are reported
on the CDMA LMF.
Individually open and then close the ACLC and power entry compartment door. Ensure that the
CDMA LMF reports an alarm when each door is opened.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 contact.
3-86
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-50: AC Fail Alarm
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
S Back–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.
S To prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should be
charged before performing this test.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay
#23, BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
S On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red)
LEDs should light.
S On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.
S On the CDMA LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.
S On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs should
extinguish.
S On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.
Minor Alarm
Table 3-51 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minor
alarm.
Table 3-51: Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.
S The CDMA LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.
S The TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.
Set the TCP switch to ON. The alarm condition indications should clear.
Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple
rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a four rectifier
system.
Single Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System)
Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Procedures
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-87
Alarms Testing – continued
in this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation with
rectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left to
right when facing the frame.
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Single–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
one rectifier is removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifier in shelf position 2.
S The MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24
contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifier, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System)
Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Procedures
in this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation with
rectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left to
right when facing the frame.
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Single–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 65
amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when two
rectifiers are removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 1 and 3.
S The MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the
MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTS
Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
3-88
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Single Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System)
Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).
Table 3-54: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Two–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
two rectifiers are removed from the bus in the following steps.
Unseat the rectifier in shelf position 4 from its connection at the rear of the shelf, but do not
completely remove it from the shelf.
S The rectifier 4 DC and PWR LEDs may light red momentarily and extinguish. There should be no
other indications on the frame or CDMA LMF.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The rectifier 2 DC and PWR LEDs should light red.
S The MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24
contacts, respectively.
Re–seat the rectifier in shelf position 4 into its connection at the rear of the shelf.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to ON.
S The rectifier DC and PWR LEDs should light green.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-89
Alarms Testing – continued
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System)
Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).
Table 3-55: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Two–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
two rectifiers are removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 2 and 4.
S The MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the
MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTS
Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
Battery Over Temperature
Alarm (Optional)
CAUTION
Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or
damaging battery cases when using a heat gun.
Table 3-56 gives instructions on testing the battery over–temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Use a low–powered heat gun to gently heat the battery over–temperature sensor (see location in
Figure 3-21).
! CAUTION
To avoid damaging the cable insulation, do not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches from
the sensor.
3-90
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
NOTE
When the over–temperature alarm point is reached, an audible click will sound as DC PDA relay K1
contacts engage and relay K2 contacts disengage (make–before–break operation).
When the sensor is heated to approximately 51° C, a battery over–temperature alarm is generated with
the following indications.
S On the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should light and the MAIN CONN. ENABLE
LED (green) should extinguish.
S The CDMA LMF should display an alarm condition as BTS Relay #22 contacts.
Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contacts return to normal position
(K1 open and K2 closed). The following indications that alarms have cleared should occur:
S On the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should extinguish and the MAIN CONN.
ENABLE (green) LED should light.
S The alarm reported on CDMA LMF will clear
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-91
Alarms Testing – continued
Figure 3-21: Battery Over–Temperature Sensor
Bus Bar
6 AWG Cables
Battery Overtemp Sensor
Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor
SC4812ETL0014–1
3-92
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Rectifier Over Temperature
Alarm
Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing the rectifier over–temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-57: Rectifier Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Remove the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners securing the rear access panel to the rear of the frame
(Figure 2-1), and remove the rear access panel.
NOTE
Panel fastener type can be either T–27 button head or T–30 pan head.
Looking up through the frame rear access opening, locate the rear of the MAP.
Remove the jumper plug from connector J8 on the rear panel of the MAP (Figure 3-22). The
following conditions should occur:
S Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1 now closed and K2 open).
S The CDMA LMF reports an alarm condition as BTS Relay #26 contacts.
Reinstall the jumper plug in connector J8, and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared.
Reinstall the frame rear access panel, securing it with the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners removed
in step 1.
Figure 3-22: MAP Connector J8 (Rear of MAP)
J12
J3
J8
J9
J7
J4
J5
J1
J2
CONNECTOR J8
SC4812ETL0021–1
Before Leaving the site
If no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,
complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-93
Alarms Testing – continued
Notes
3-94
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-3
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All–inclusive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX/RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
4-7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
4-10
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
4-12
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-13
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
4-15
4-15
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4-18
4-19
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4-20
4-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction
Introduction
The automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the CDMA LMF GUI environment and
supported test equipment.
The operator can choose to save the results of these tests to a report file,
from which ATP reports are generated for later printout.
Perform the ATP test on out-of-service sectors or sites only. Because all
tests are controlled via the CDMA LMF computer using the GPIB
interface from the CDMA LMF computer, only recommended test
equipment supported by the CDMA LMF can be used.
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
IMPORTANT
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors
only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
The CFE selects the appropriate ATP tests to run to satisfy customer and
regulatory requirements for verifying cell site performance. These tests
can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
S All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit
elements. These include the GLI2, MCC, BBX2, BDC, and trunking
modules, the LPAs, and passive components including splitters,
combiners, bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.
S All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receive elements.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), , BBX2, MCC, and GLI2
modules, and the passive components including RX filter (starter
frame only), and RF cables.
S All TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.
S Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continued
Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, all applicable procedures
outlined in Chapter 3, Optimization/Calibration, must have been
completed successfully (i.e., code load and BLO calibration).
NOTE
You cannot substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the CDMA LMF.
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:
S BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S CSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)
have correct code load and data load
Primary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACT
MCCs are INS_ACT
BBX2s are OOS-RAM
BBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded
Test cables are calibrated
Test equipment is selected
Test equipment is connected for ATP tests
Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated
GPIB is on
WARNING
Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter
connectors are properly terminated.
All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for all
ATP tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX/RX Antenna Connections
Refer to Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7 for identification of the transmit and
receive antenna connections where measurement are to be taken.
Directional couplers for signal sampling by the RFDS, if installed, are
integral to the SC4812ET Lite transmit and receive paths in the DRDCs
and TRDCs. As a result, all ATP measurement connections are made at
the antenna connectors on the RF interface panel.
4-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
S LMF
S Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
S Communications test set
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels
keyed.
At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
You must recalibrate the test equipment before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
Acceptance Test Equipment
Set Up
Follow the steps in Table 4-1 to set up test equipment for all tests.
Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 and
Figure 3-10).
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.
If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17 or Figure 3-18, as applicable for the test
equipment being used, to connect test equipment for acceptance testing.
* IMPORTANT
CDMA LMF–based measurement commands factor in TX test cable loss between the RFM frame and
test equipment. No additional attenuation can be inserted as the additional losses would not be
factored in.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
PRELIMINARY
4-3
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
All–inclusive Tests
The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the LMF GUI
environment. These tests execute various combinations of individual
acceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification of
multiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for
individual test set up and initiation.
There are three abbreviated acceptance tests which evaluate different
performance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing to
meet the specific requirements for individual maintenance and
performance verification situations. The following summarizes the
coverage of each abbreviated test:
S All TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBX2s.
S All TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of the
following individual tests:
– TX Mask Test
– Rho Test
– Pilot Time Offset Test
– Code Domain Power Test
S All RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs and
BBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:
– FER Test
4-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
All TX/RX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-2 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit and receive test.
Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All TX/RX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All TX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit test.
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All TX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-5
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All RX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-4 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive receive test.
Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All RX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specific
aspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.
All testing is performed using the CDMA LMF GUI environment.
TX Testing
TX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output power
control. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set. All
measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link using
all BBX2s assigned to all respective sector/antennas. Each BBX2 is
keyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbx level and bay
level offsets) at the CDF file carrier output power level (as specified in
the site documentation).
RX Testing
RX testing verifies any given receive antenna path. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set to inject a CDMA RF
carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX frequency via the
appropriate RX IN connector.
RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link using
all equipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.
Individual Tests
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as defined
in IS–97) with respect to the assigned cdf file values.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.
Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMA
modulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Walsh
code 0).
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-7
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continued
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
BTS Frame Error Rate
This test verifies the BTS receive Frame Error Rate (FER) on all Traffic
Channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at
one percent FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RX
antenna paths using all equipped MCCs and BBX2s at the site. The
diversity RX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equipped
MCC/CE ONLY.
NOTE
There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readings
taken at level below –119 dBm, other than to verify that
the FER measurement reflects changes in the RX input
signal level.
4-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 541 for each antenna, and the forward link will
be disabled for all Traffic CHannel (TCH) elements from the MCCs. The
BBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). RF output
will be set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to the
mean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth,
in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following test
points (see also Figure 4-1):
S For 800 MHz:
–
–
–
–
At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
At least –60 dB @ –1980 kHz from center frequency
At least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency
S For 1.9 GHz:
– At least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
– At least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-9
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-5 to verify the transmit spectral mask
specification on all TX antenna paths using all BBXs equipped at the
BTS.
Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
– 1980 kHz
+ 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
08/01/2001
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-11
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyed
up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). RF output power is set
at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage, verifying
that the result meets system tolerances:
Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.912.
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-6 to verify the pilot channel element
waveform quality (rho) on the specified TX antenna paths using BBXs
equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select Rho.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests will be performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the TX OUT connector.
The pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyed
up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). TX power output is set
at 40 dBm as measured at the TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the Pilot
Time Offset in ms, verifying that results meet system tolerances:
Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset
(zero ms).
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
NOTE
This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency and
TX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only Pilot
Time Offset results are written to the ATP test report.
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance
Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on the
specified TX antenna paths using BBXs and BDCs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select Pilot Time Offset.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-13
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Tests – continued
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step
Action
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each BBX
carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file
assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set
controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the
appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all equipped MCCs
will be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh code Traffic
channel elements by enabling Orthagonal Channel Noise Source
(OCNS) on all odd MCC/CEs, (maximum 32 full rate channels with an
OCNS gain of 81). All even–numbered Walsh code Traffic channel
elements will not have OCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. All
equipped MCCs will be forward–link enabled for the antenna/sector
under test.
The BBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier consisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RF
output power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
channel element power (dB) of all specified Walsh channels within the
CDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify the
following parameters are met (Figure 4-2):
S Traffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating the
ratio of PILOT power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels (root sum
of the square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilot power).
This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.
S Noise floor (unassigned “OFF” even numbered Walsh channels) are
verified to be < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS channels will be disabled
on the specified MCC/CEs.
Code Domain Power/Noise
Floor Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noise
floor of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-15
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) Example
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-17
RX FER Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TCHs
currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at 1% FER) at –119
dBm on the main RX antenna paths. The test is performed on all
diversity RX antenna path using only the lowest equipped MCC/CE. All
tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as the signal
source controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the
LMF.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each TX antenna, and the forward link
for all TCH elements from the MCCs will be disabled. The BBX2 will
be keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA
carrier (with pilot channel element only). TX power output is set at +10
dBm. (The BBX must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive
circuitry.)
The LMF will prompt the MCC/CE under test to measure all–zero
longcode and provide the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) report on the
selected active MCC on the Reverse Link for both the main and diversity
RX antenna paths, verifying results meet the following specification:
FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500.
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current RX antenna paths under test. The test will then be
repeated.
4-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued
FER Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on all RX antenna paths
using all BBXs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-9: Test FER
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select FER.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
From the RX Branch pick list, select the branch/branches to be tested.
Select the desired rate from the Rate Set pick list (1 = 9600, 2 = 14400).
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
10
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-19
Generating an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated and must be
saved using the Save Results button to close the status report window.
The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closed
using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
Test name
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
Follow the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printable
file for the ATP report.
Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report
Step
Action
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to start the report.
If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file, type in the pick list and click on the Save
button.
4-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Modules into Service with the CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Updating Calibration Data Files
Updating CBSC Calibration
Data Files
After completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL file
information must be moved from the LMF Windows environment back
to the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detail
moving files from one environment to the other.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk
Follow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette
Step
Action
With Windows running on the CDMA LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:.
Launch the Windows Explorer Program from your Programs menu list.
Select the applicable wlmf/cdma/bts–# folder.
Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
Log in to the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.
Place your diskette containing calibration file(s) in the workstation diskette drive.
Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.
Type in mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
S Check to see that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.
S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.
Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.
Type in cd and press the Enter key.
Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify you are in your home directory (/home/).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-1
Back Up Calibration Data Files – continued
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in your home
directory by entering the following command:
dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is BTS
number).
NOTE
Other versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp
(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited out
with a Unix text editor.
10
Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the cal files have been copied.
11
Type in eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
5-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Prepare to Leave the Site
Removing External Test
Equipment
Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the frame RF interface panel.
! CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossed
antenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.
Reset All Devices and Initialize
Site Remotely
Generally, devices in the BTS should not be left with data and code
loaded from the CDMA LMF. The configuration data and code loads
used for normal operation could be different from those stored in the
CDMA LMF files. By resetting all devices, the required data and code
can be loaded from the CBSC when spans are again active.
To reset all devices and have the OMCR/CBSC bring up the site
remotely, perform the procedure in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
Action
Terminate the CDMA LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.
NOTE
In the following step, performing Table 2-6 DC voltage measurements other than those using the MAP
VOLT and AMP indicators is not necessary if DC power system components have not been replaced
during the optimization and/or ATP process.
Cycle BTS power off, as specified in Table 2-9, and on, as specified in Table 2-5, Table 2-6, and step 1
of Table 2-7, respectively.
Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.
Notify the OMCR/CBSC to take control of the site and download code and data to the BTS.
Verify the CBSC can communicate with the GLIs.
Bringing Modules into Service
with the CDMA LMF
IMPORTANT
08/01/2001
Whenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the site
and enable all devices at the BTS.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
If there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loaded
remotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-5 as
required to bring BTS processor modules from OOS to INS state.
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service
Step
Action
In the CDMA LMF GUI environment, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
S The MGLI, CSM, and applicable BDC must be INS before an MCC can be enabled to INS.
S Processors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:
–
–
–
–
MGLI
GLI
CSMs
MCCs
Click on Device from the menu bar.
Click on Enable from the Device menu. A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Do
not enable the BBX.
Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.
Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
Terminating LMF
Session/Removing Terminal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMF
GUI session and remove the CDMA LMF computer.
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not power down the CDMA LMF terminal without performing the procedure below.
Corrupted/lost data files may result.
Log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu bar
and selecting Exit from the File menu list.
Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up message which appears.
In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears
Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.
. . . continued on next page
5-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step
Action
Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS frame.
Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and the
GPIB cables as required for equipment transport.
Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 or E1 span connectors removed
previously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7 and
Figure 3-7.
Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans
Step
Action
Re–connect any disconnected span connectors to the Span I/O A and B boards.
If equipped, ensure the CSU is powered on.
Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS.
Before Leaving the site
Be sure all requirements listed in Table 5-8 are completed before leaving
the site.
Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site
Step
Action
All battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are ON (pushed in).
Both heat exchanger circuit breakers on the DC PDA are set to ON (pushed in), and the heat
exchanger blowers are running.
The External Blower Assembly (EBA) power cable is connected, and the EBA is running.
The MAP power switch is set to ON, and the POWER (green) LED is lighted.
The BATT TEST switch on the MAP is set to OFF, and the BATT. TEST (amber) LED is not lighted.
No alarm conditions are being reported to the CBSC with all frame doors closed.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Notes
5-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-5
6-6
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-9
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
6-11
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Every Test Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify BLO Checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Faults Are Isolated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-19
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-24
6-25
RFDS – Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules
(except GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
6-35
6-36
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides “what to do if” basic troubleshooting
suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform per the
procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained from experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by
re-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red
LED may also indicate no termination on an external LAN connector (power entry
compartment at rear of frame).
Verify that the span line is disconnected at the Span I/O card. If the span is still
connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.
Verify the LMF is connected to the primary LAN (LAN A) at the LAN shelf
below the SCCP cage. If LAN A is not the active LAN, force a LAN switch to
LAN A by following the procedure in Table 6-2.
Verify the LMF was configured properly.
If a Xircom parallel BNC LAN interface is being used, verify the BTS-LMF cable
is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).
Verify the external LAN connectors are properly terminated (power entry
compartment at rear of frame).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF computer side connector when connected
to the primary LAN at the LAN shelf.
Try connecting to the Ethernet Out port in the power entry compartment (rear of
frame). Use a TRB–to–BNC (triax–to–coax) adapter at the LAN connector for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12
Verify GLI2 IP addresses are configured properly by following the procedure in
Table 6-3.
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
n Step
Action
If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all external LAN connectors are
terminated with 50Ω loads or cabled to another frame.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the stand–alone or
starter frame, as applicable (Table 3-6).
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS on
the active LAN (Table 3-7).
. . . continued on next page
6-2
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
n Step
Remove the 50Ω termination from the LAN B IN connector in the power entry
compartment at the rear of the stand–alone or starter frame. The CDMA LMF
session will become inactive.
Disconnect the LMF computer from the LAN shelf LAN B connector and connect
it to the LAN A connector.
If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can be
selected and statused), proceed to step 13.
With the 50Ω termination still removed from the LAN B IN connector, remove
the 50Ω termination from LAN B OUT connector. If more than one frame is
connected to the LAN, remove the termination from the last frame in the chain.
If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can be
selected and statused), proceed to step 13.
With the 50Ω terminations still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI card in
each frame connected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the shelf
backplanes.
10
Reseat each GLI card until all are reconnected.
11
Allow the GLIs to power up, and attempt to select and status cards in the CCP
shelves. If LAN A is active, proceed to step 13.
12
If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following
the procedures in Table 6-1.
13
08/01/2001
Action
Replace the 50Ω terminations removed from the LAN B IN and OUT connectors.
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-3
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting
n Step
Action
If it has not previously been done, establish an MMI communication session with
the GLI card as described in Table 3-11.
Enter the following command to display the IP address and subnet mask settings
for the card:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 current
lg0: IP address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
If the IP address setting response shows an IP address rather than “Default
(configured based on card location),” enter the following:
config lg0 ip default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 ip default
_param_config_lg0_ip(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: ip address set to DEFAULT
If the GLI subnet mask setting does not display as “DEFAULT
(255.255.255.128),” set it to default by entering the following command:
config lg0 netmask default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 netmask default
_param_config_lg0_netmask(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: netmask set to DEFAULT
. . . continued on next page
6-4
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting
n Step
Action
Set the GLI route default to default by entering the following command:
config route default default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config route default default
_esh_config_route_default(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
route: default gateway set to DEFAULT
NOTE
Changes to the settings will not take effect unless the GLI is reset.
When changes are completed, close the MMI session, and reset the GLI card.
Once the GLI is reset, re–establish MMI communication with it and issue the
following command to confirm its IP address and subnet mask settings:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 current
lg0: IP address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all remaining GLI2s, including those in any
additional, inter–connected frames.
Cannot Communicate with
Power Meter
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section of Chapter 3 for details.
. . . continued on next page
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-5
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.
Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Control
mode.
Cannot Communicate with
Communications Analyzer
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
n Step
6-6
Action
Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup.
Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.
If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Control mode.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Download
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
n Step
Action
Verify T1 or E1 span is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.
Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any
other BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.
If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat card and try again.
If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
Status it to verify the load.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by
clicking on the device and selecting DEVICE > RESET.
Cannot Download DATA to Any
Device (Card)
Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the
card. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-7
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is
enabled.
The three states that devices can be displayed:
S Enabled (green, INS)
S Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
S Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
n Step
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude
data for cell site location and GPS sync.
Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
6-8
Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock is present; MCCs will not go INS without it.
BBXs should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
LPA Errors
Table 6-9: LPA Errors
n Step
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,
then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a HyperTerminal connection.
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting hyperTerminal
display may provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further
assistance.)
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-9
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
n Step
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup
section) and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following
bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working, the Meter
display will show “RES :’’
Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.
6-10
Action
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
Calibration Audit Failure
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
n Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup
section).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by
pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Download Code > Download Data>Enable.
Re-try the audit.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 6-11
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation
Overview
The optimization (RF path characterization or calibration) and
post-calibration (audit) procedures measure and limit-check the BTS
reported transmit and receive levels of the path from each BBX2 to the
back of the frame. When a fault is detected, it is specific to a receive or
transmit path. The troubleshooting process in this section determines the
most probable cause of the fault.
As the calibration and audit tests are performed, results are displayed in
the LMF test status report window. When faults are encountered, the test
procedure in progress continues running and displaying any further
faults. If it appears that there are major faults, the test can be aborted.
The test results can be saved to a bts–<#>.rpt file in the
wlmf\cdma\bts–<#> folder. To do this, close the test status report
window using the Save Results button.
IMPORTANT
Closing the test status report window with the Dismiss
button will delete the test results without saving them.
If a test is re–run or a new calibration, audit, or test is run and the results
are saved, the previous test results in the bts–<#>.rpt file are
overwritten. To prevent losing previous test results in the bts–<#>.rpt
file, refer to the procedure in Table 4-10 before performing further
testing with the LMF.
If there are major faults, recheck the test equipment attachments for
errors. If none are found, close the test status report window using the
Save Results button, and save the contents of the resulting
bts–<#>.rpt file as described in Table 4-10. Also, note other specifics
about the failure, and proceed with the fault isolation procedure.
If Every Test Fails
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually
setting the signal generator output attenuator to the lowest output power
setting. Connect the output port to the spectrum analyzer RF input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the
RF output. Verify that the spectrum analyzer can receive the signal,
indicate the correct signal strength (accounting for the cable insertion
loss), and indicate the approximate frequency.
6-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continued
Verify BLO Checkbox
When performing a calibration with the TX Calibration... or All
Cal/Audit... functions, the Verify BLO checkbox should normally be
checked. When a calibration fails, determine if any items such as
directional couplers or combiners have been added to the TX path. If
additional items have been installed in the path, try re–running the
calibration with Verify BLO unchecked. If calibration still does not
pass, refer to the following paragraphs and use the TX output fault
isolation flowchart to identify the most probable cause of the failure.
If Faults Are Isolated
If the fault reports are isolated between successful path checks, the root
cause of the faults most likely lies with one or more of the Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU) modules. If more than one failure was reported,
look for a common denominator in the data. For example, if any TX test
fails on one sector only, the BBX2 assigned to that sector (Table 1-5) is a
likely cause. Also, look at the severity of the failure. If the path loss is
just marginally out of the relaxed specification limit during the
post-calibration TX audit, suspect excessive cable loss. If limits are
missed by a wide margin, suspect mis–wired cables or total device
failure. Use the TX output fault isolation flowchart in Figure 6-1 to
identify the strongest possible cause for a failed TX test.
Fault Isolation Flowchart
The flowchart covers the transmit path. Transmit paths usually fail the
lower test limit, indicating excessive loss in some component in the BTS
site or mis–wiring. A failure of an upper limit usually indicates a
problem with the test setup or external equipment. Before replacing a
suspected FRU, always repeat and verify the test results to rule out a
transient condition. If a BBX2 fails an upper limit in the post–calibration
audit procedure, re–calibrate and verify the out–of–tolerance condition
for that BBX2 and/or sector before replacement.
Flowchart Prerequisites
Before entering the fault isolation sequence outlined in the flowchart, be
sure the following have been completed:
S GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have been downloaded with the correct ROM
code, RAM code, and data (Table 3-13, Table 3-14, and Table 3-15).
S MGLI, CSMs, and MCCs are enabled (Table 3-14, Table 3-17, and
Table 3-18, respectively)
S Be sure the LED on the correct CCD card is solid green.
S Be sure no alarms are being reported by opening an LMF alarm
window as outlined in Table 3-47.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-13
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continued
TX Power Output Fault
Isolation Flowchart
Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart
Start
TX Power
Out of Limits
Did TX Output
fail the High or
Low limit?
High limit
failure.
Does
redundant BBX
have the same
problem on the
same sector?
No
Likely Cause:
Yes
Low limit
failure.
Does any other
sector have the
same problem?
Yes
Likely Cause:
External Power Measurement
Equipment and/or Set–up.
Also check:
Switch card
External Attenuators & Pads,
Check Site Documentation.
Likely Cause:
CIO card
Carrier trunking module
Also check:
CIO–trunking module cabling
TX filter/combiner cabling
TX DRDC/TRDC cabling
Likely Cause:
BBX card
Loose connections on
CIO–trunking module cabling,
TX filter/combiner cabling, or
TX DRDC/TRDC cabling
Also check:
CIO card
Carrier trunking module
Likely Cause:
Crossed TX cabling to include:
– CIO–trunking module,
– Trunking module–filter/combiner,
– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDC
Carrier LPAs
Also check:
Carrier trunking module
CIO card.
Likely Cause:
CIO card not fully seated
External Power Measurement
Equipment and/or Set–up
Crossed TX cabling to include:
– CIO–trunking module,
– Trunking module–filter/combiner,
– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDC
No
If equipped, does a
BBX on the same
carrier but for a
different sector
pass?
Yes, it passes.
No, next BBX on same carrier
fails on different sector.
If equipped, does a
BBX on a different
carrier but for the
same sector
pass?
Yes, it passes.
No, everything fails
6-14
BBX card
Attempt re–calibration
before replacement.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
Cannot Perform Txmask
Measurement
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the
CDF file.
Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may
indicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.
error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.
Press  and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an
indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be
re-initialized.
PRELIMINARY 6-15
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continued
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the
CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability
10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to
test set-up.
6-16
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
n Step
Action
Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.
Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow
LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on
extent of failure).
Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY6-17
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board problems may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock / GPS
Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration.
RF–GPS (Local GPS) – CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed
in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2,
does not have a GPS receiver.
Remote GPS (R–GPS) – Kit SGLN4132, which should be installed in
both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver.
Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center.
Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also,
verify the GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended
guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board
back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or
higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of
CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.
Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM
board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.
6-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in
the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132
must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to
function correctly.
CSM Kit No.
SGLN1145
SGLN4132
Hardware Configuration
With GPS Receiver
Without GPS Receiver
CSM Slot No.
Reference Source Configuration
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Mate GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy
flag status and/or current position. Refer to the CSM system time/GPS
and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite
should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites
should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify
correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-19
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The SCCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
SCCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:
S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
S Allow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the SCCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.
Power Input (Return A and B connectors)
Provides a 27 volt input for use by the power supply modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP backplane. These include
a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface,
and a +15V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver Power
Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 volts to be
used by the SCCP shelf cards.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the SCCP backplane.
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These SMB connectors are located on the SCCP backplane and connect
to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications over the Ethernet LAN between the master GLI2, the
other GLI2, and the LMF.
BBX2 Connector
Each BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the SCCP backplane.
6-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
CIO Connectors
S RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX paths of the
DRDCs or TRDCs at the RF interface panel (rear of frame), and
through coaxial cables to the two MPC modules. The three “A” (main)
signals go to one MPC; the three “B” (diversity) to the other. The
MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the SCCP
backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to the
appropriate BBX2.
S A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, to
the backplane, and then on to the MCC24/MCC8E slots.
S Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24/MCC8Es.
Each output is routed from the MCC24/MCC8E slot through the
backplane to the appropriate BBX2.
S TX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, travels through the
backplane to the CIO, through the CIO, and then through
multi-conductor coaxial cabling to the trunking module and LPAs in
the LPA shelf.
SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
The following tables provide standard procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps which should
be taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
IMPORTANT
It is important to note that all steps be followed before
replacing ANY SCCP backplane.
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step
08/01/2001
Action
Check the Ethernet LAN for proper connection, damage,
shorts, or opens.
Be sure the LAN IN and OUT connectors in the power entry
compartment are properly terminated.
Be sure the proper IP address is entered in the Network Login
tab of the LMF login screen.
Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-21
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Table 6-18: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both
GLI2s)
Step
Action
Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR/CBSC data base.
Verify the span configurations set in the GLI2s match those in
the OMC–R/CBSC database (refer to Table 6-29).
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the
master GLI2 for proper connection and damage.
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
6-22
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No BBX2 Control in the Shelf
Table 6-21: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
BBX2s
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check BBX2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Table 6-22: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and
cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX2, replace the
BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements
Table 6-23: No MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements
Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24/MCC8E (MccType=2)
If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24/MCC8E,
replace the MCC24/MCC8E with a known good
MCC24/MCC8E.
– Check connectors (both module and backplane) for
damage.
If no CEs on any MCC24/MCC8E:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-23
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DC Power Problems
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
No DC Input Voltage to SCCP Shelf Power Supply Modules
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the frame. Determine if any
circuit breakers are tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the SCCP
shelf and attempt to reset it.
– If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker
problem within the frame or DC PDA.
– If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective
module or sub–assembly within the shelf. Perform the
tests in Table 2-3 to attempt to isolate the module.
Verify that the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers on the DC PDA
are functional.
Remove the frame rear access panel (Figure 2-1), and use a
voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to
the SCCP backplane. Measure the DC voltage level between:
S The PWR_IN_A and PWR_RTN_A contacts on the
extreme right side at the rear of the backplane
S The PWR_IN_B and PWR_RTN_B contacts on the
extreme right side at the rear of the backplane
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or
circuit breaker problem within the frame or DC PDA.
6-24
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the PS1
and PS2 power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply modules with a known good
module.
If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, an SCCP
backplane failure has occurred (possibly an open trace).
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX2, or Switchmodule
Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify steps outlined in Table 6-24 have been performed.
Inspect the defective module connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace suspect module with known good module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Table 6-26: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and backplane
connectors for damage in all the affected board slots.
Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting
flowchart in Figure 6-1.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-25
RFDS – Fault Isolation
Introduction
The RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the
directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the
following tables.
All tests fail
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail
Step
Action
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output
attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer
rf input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the
spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable
insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.
Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to
the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.
Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.
Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.
Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check for
external damage.
If any boards that do not show green replace the RFDS with a known–good unit. Re–test after
replacement.
All RX and TX paths fail
If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Replace the RFDS with a
known–good unit and retest.
All tests fail on a single
antenna
If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,
make the following checks.
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna
port.
Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the
RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.
. . . continued on next page
6-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.
Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.
NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2, CSM,
BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
6-28
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
S Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-29
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
6-30
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 LED Status Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-3.
The indicators and controls consist of:
S Four LEDs
S One pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER LED
S Solid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
S Off – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
S Solid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
S Off – No Alarm.
STATUS LED
S Flashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
S On – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
S Off – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS LED
S Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
S Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-31
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will be
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators
LED
ALARM LED
ALARM
SPANS LED
SPANS
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
STATUS
STATUS LED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
STATUS
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ALARM
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
MASTER
MASTER LED
OPERATING STATUS
FW00225
6-32
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
BBX2 LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC24 LED Status
Combinations
The MCC24 module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below. See Figure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectors
as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
S RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
S Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
S The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
S The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-33
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Figure 6-4: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB module
next to the MMI connector. Interpret this LED as follows:
S GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
S Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
S Flashing RED — LPA is in alarm.
6-34
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Table 6-29: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
n Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in
Figure 6-5.
Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI2>
prompt is obtained.
At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-30.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
S Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
S Listen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-35
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
STATUS
RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
To MMI port
RESET
Pushbutton
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
IMPORTANT
6-36
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in Figure 6-5.
If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2, initiate
one by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
config ni format


The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option
Next available options:
LIST –
option : Span Option
E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
no TS16
E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
TS16
E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS
T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default
J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.
To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as
shown in the following example:
> T1_2

NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI2>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI2>
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-37
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni linkspeed

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
Next available options:
LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed
56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.
To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),
as shown in the following example:
> 64K

NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI2>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed.
GLI2>
It will take effect after the next reset.
If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni equal

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal
Next available options:
LIST –
span : Span
a : Span
b : Span
c : Span
d : Span
e : Span
f : Span
span equal
. . . continued on next page
6-38
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
10
Action
At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in
the following example:
> a

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal
Next available options:
LIST –
equal : Span Equalization
0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1)
1 : 132–262 feet
2 : 263–393 feet
3 : 394–524 feet
4 : 525–655 feet
5 : LONG HAUL
6 : 75 OHM
7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)
11
At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the
following example:
> 0

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
> 0
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI2>
12
Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.
13
* IMPORTANT
After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,
the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and
linkspeed used at the site.
Press the RESET button on the MGLI2/GLI2 for changes to take effect.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-39
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
14
Action
Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are as
required:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – 0–131 feet
Span B – 0–131 feet
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: 64K
Currently, the link is running at 64K
The actual rate is 0
15
If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it and
repeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.
16
Return to step 6 of Table 6-29.
6-40
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
A
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
08/01/2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
A-10
A-11
A-11
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
A-13
A-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-1
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
Deliveries
Per established procedures
Floor Plan
Verified
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Factory Data:
BBX2
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Site Temperature
Dress Covers/Brackets
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
Frame ID DIP Switches
Per site equipage
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Pre–power–up tests
Specification
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Internal Cables:
Span
CSM
Power
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
LAN A IN & OUT terminators
LAN B IN & OUT terminators
Ethernet Boots
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
Initial power–up tests
Table 2-4
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Frame fans
LEDs
operational
illuminated
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
installed
installed
Comments:_________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-3
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
General Optimization Checklist
Table A3b: General Optimization Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Preparing the LMF
Load LMF software
Create site–specific BTS directory
Create HyperTerminal connection
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
LMF–to–BTS Connection
Verify GLI2 ethernet address settings
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
Table 3-6
Table 6-3
Table 3-12
Table 3-12
Table 3-13
Verify ROM code loads for software
release
Download/Enable MGLI2s
Download/Enable GLI2s
Set Site Span Configuration
Set CSM clock source
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCC24s/MCC8Es
Download BBX2s
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
Test Set Calibration
Table 3-25
Comments
Table 3-14
Table 3-14
Table 6-29
Table 3-16
Table 3-17
Table 3-15
Table 3-15
Table 3-39
Table 3-46
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in
msec and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-5
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment.
SN ratio is > 8 dB
LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
As specified in site
documentation
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
OK
Comments
CARRIER
LPA
Specification
2:1
3–Sector
BP
3–Sector
1A
C1
C1
No Alarms
1B
C1
C1
No Alarms
1C
C1
C1
No Alarms
1D
C1
C1
No Alarms
3A
C2
C2
No Alarms
3B
C2
C2
No Alarms
3C
C2
C2
No Alarms
3D
C2
C2
No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-7
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Bay Level Offset / Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1A =
BBX2–r, ANT–1A =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2A =
BBX2–r, ANT–2A =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A =
BBX2–r, ANT–3A =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B =
BBX2–r, ANT–1B =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2B =
BBX2–r, ANT–2B =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B =
BBX2–r, ANT–3B =
dB
dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1A =
BBX2–r, ANT–1A =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2A =
BBX2–r, ANT–2A =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A =
BBX2–r, ANT–3A =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B =
BBX2–r, ANT–1B =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2B =
BBX2–r, ANT–2B =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B =
BBX2–r, ANT–3B =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+5 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+5 dB)
prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post–calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post–calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1A =
BBX2–r, ANT–1A =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2A =
BBX2–r, ANT–2A =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A =
BBX2–r, ANT–3A =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B =
BBX2–r, ANT–1B =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2B =
BBX2–r, ANT–2B =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B =
BBX2–r, ANT–3B =
dB
dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1A =
BBX2–r, ANT–1A =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2A =
BBX2–r, ANT–2A =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A =
BBX2–r, ANT–3A =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B =
BBX2–r, ANT–1B =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2B =
BBX2–r, ANT–2B =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B =
BBX2–r, ANT–3B =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-9
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 1B
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2B
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3B
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3A
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 1B
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2B
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3B
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Alarm Verification
Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Verify CDI alarm input
operation per Table 3-5.
Specification
Data
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Comments:_________________________________________________________
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-11
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Notes
A-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Site Serial Number Check List
Date
Site
SCCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
SCCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO/LFR
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–2
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
BBX2–R1
MCC24–1
MCC24–2
MCC24–3
MCC24–4
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-13
A
Site Serial Number Check List – continued
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
A-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-1
B-1
B-2
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
IMPORTANT
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime a RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
BTS Frame
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced
Optimize:
SCCP Shelf
All sector TX and RX paths to the SCCP
shelf
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card
The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the SCCP shelf in the BTS frames
BBX2 board
RX and TX paths of the affected SCCP
shelf / BBX2 board
CIO Card
All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier
Any LPA Module
The affected sector TX path.
DRDC or TRDC
All affected sector RX and TX paths
RFDS
The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD)
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced
08/01/2001
Optimize:
Expansion frame–to–BTS
frame (RX) cables
The affected sector/antenna RX paths
Expansion frame–to–BTS
frame (TX) cables
The affected sector/antenna TX paths
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-1
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test
Matrix
Table B-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
IMPORTANT
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table B-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any SCCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that only
power to the SCCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the breaker
supplying that shelf.
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
When the CIO is replaced, the SCCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
B-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
RX Filter
RX Cables
TX Cables
Multicoupler/Preselector
CIO
SCCP Backplane
BBX2
MCC24/MCC8E
CSM
LFR/HSO
GPS
GLI2
LPA
LPA Filter Bandpass
Power Supply Modules (See Note)
Switch Card
LPA Combiner Filter 2:1
Description
Directional Coupler (TX)
Doc
Tbl
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table B-3: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Table 2-1
Initial Boards/Modules
Install, Preliminary
Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
Table 2-6
Initial Power-up
Start LMF
Download Code
Enable CSMs
Table 3-20
GPS &HSO Initialization /
Verification
Table 3-21
LFR Initialization /
Verification
TX Path Calibration
Table 3-6/
Table 3-7
Table 3-14/
Table 3-15
Table 3-17
Table 3-34/
Table 3-35
Table 3-36
Download Offsets to BBX2
Table 3-37
TX Path Calibration Audit
Table 3-45
RFDS Path Calibration
Table 4-5
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Table 4-6
Waveform Quality (rho)
Table 4-7
Pilot Time Offset
Table 4-8
Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor
Table 4-9
FER Test
NOTE
Replace power supply modules one card at a time so that power to the SCCP shelf is not lost. If power
to the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-3
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Notes
B-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix Content
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
C-1
C-1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Usage & Background
Table C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant
RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the
table. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) values
have been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMA
carrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).
Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shown
to correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44
dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
C-1
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
32.7
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
32.4
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
32.9
31.9
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
32.6
31.6
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
31.2
C-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
Appendix Content
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
D-1
D-1
D-1
D-2
D-4
D-4
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLI2s via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX2.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
08/01/2001
FW00463
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
D-1
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHz
S RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
25
0019
50
0032
75
004B
100
0064
125
007D
150
0096
175
00AF
200
00C8
225
00E1
250
00FA
275
0113
300
012C
325
0145
350
015E
375
0177
400
0190
425
01A9
450
01C2
475
01DB
500
01F4
525
020D
550
0226
575
023F
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1931.25
1932.50
1933.75
1935.00
1936.25
1937.50
1938.75
1940.00
1941.25
1942.50
1943.75
1945.00
1946.25
1947.50
1948.75
1950.00
1951.25
1952.50
1953.75
1955.00
1956.25
1957.50
1958.75
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1851.25
1852.50
1853.75
1855.00
1856.25
1857.50
1858.75
1860.00
1861.25
1862.50
1863.75
1865.00
1866.25
1867.50
1868.75
1870.00
1871.25
1872.50
1873.75
1875.00
1876.25
1877.50
1878.75
. . . continued on next page
D-2
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
600
0258
625
0271
650
028A
675
02A3
700
02BC
725
02D5
750
02EE
775
0307
800
0320
825
0339
850
0352
875
036B
900
0384
925
039D
950
03B6
975
03CF
1000
03E8
1025
0401
1050
041A
1075
0433
1100
044C
1125
0465
1150
047E
1175
0497
08/01/2001
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1960.00
1961.25
1962.50
1963.75
1965.00
1966.25
1967.50
1968.75
1970.00
1971.25
1972.50
1973.75
1975.00
1976.25
1977.50
1978.75
1980.00
1981.25
1982.50
1983.75
1985.00
1986.25
1987.50
1988.75
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1880.00
1881.25
1882.50
1883.75
1885.00
1886.25
1887.50
1888.75
1890.00
1891.25
1892.50
1893.75
1895.00
1896.25
1897.50
1898.75
1900.00
1901.25
1902.50
1903.75
1905.00
1906.25
1807.50
1908.75
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
D-3
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
893.970
848.970
799
891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
694
689
777
889.980
890.010
844.980
845.010
666
667
644
356
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
739
879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333
334
311
716
717
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
1023
869.040
RX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
TX FREQ
(MHz)
991
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
S Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
S RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
D-4
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
825.0300
0001
870.0300
25
0019
870.7500
825.7500
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
08/01/2001
03FF
870.0000
825.0000
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
D-5
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Notes
D-6
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E-1
E-1
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where the
corresponding I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table E-1.
PN Offset Usage
There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to
determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS
functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file
FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with
“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the
processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of
mobile meeting IS–97 specifications.
Observe the following guidelines:
S If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the
FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table
MUST be used.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
S If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 13 chip table.
IMPORTANT
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
– If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from
the 13 chip delay table.
– If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset
problem, (any mobile meeting the IS–97 specification), use the 14
chip delay table.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-1
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
IMPORTANT
If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong
FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur.
This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”
over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code
that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence
of smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not at
correct levels or present when not selected in the Code
Domain Power Test.
E-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29673
16146
2350
7203
19657
28816
19740
21695
2916
18923
27855
24350
30205
14960
12592
13141
27167
7770
11513
30409
2025
21210
15131
9000
10028
18023
29662
8719
2551
4651
8577
2599
2303
12402
8590
17749
16902
11925
27824
22053
5015
8492
18968
25115
26607
15050
3961
19051
29602
31940
22565
25581
29082
8699
32082
18921
1128
27217
547
10601
21812
28727
9445
29367
11210
10084
6177
23525
5917
23153
30973
31679
25887
18994
6879
5889
18647
3592
1181
12920
23028
5201
19842
8854
5315
3406
7175
23367
32489
1326
9949
1005
12968
31109
5976
28761
32710
22548
14099
21761
4231
23681
73E9
3F12
092E
1C23
4CC9
7090
4D1C
54BF
0B64
49EB
6CCF
5F1E
75FD
3A70
3130
3355
6A1F
1E5A
2CF9
76C9
07E9
52DA
3B1B
2328
272C
4667
73DE
220F
09F7
122B
2181
0A27
08FF
3072
218E
4555
4206
2E95
6CB0
5625
1397
212C
4A18
621B
67EF
3ACA
0F79
4A6B
73A2
7CC4
5825
63ED
719A
21FB
7D52
49E9
0468
6A51
0223
2969
5534
7037
24E5
72B7
2BCA
2764
1821
5BE5
171D
5A71
78FD
7BBF
651F
4A32
1ADF
1701
48D7
0E08
049D
3278
59F4
1451
4D82
2296
14C3
0D4E
1C07
5B47
7EE9
052E
26DD
03ED
32A8
7985
1758
7059
7FC6
5814
3713
5501
1087
5C81
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
4096
9167
22417
966
14189
29150
18245
1716
11915
20981
24694
11865
6385
27896
25240
30877
30618
26373
314
17518
21927
2245
18105
8792
21440
15493
26677
11299
12081
23833
20281
10676
16981
31964
26913
14080
23842
27197
22933
30220
12443
19854
14842
15006
702
21373
23874
3468
31323
29266
16554
4096
1571
7484
6319
2447
24441
27351
23613
29008
5643
28085
18200
21138
21937
25222
109
6028
22034
15069
4671
30434
11615
19838
14713
241
24083
7621
19144
1047
26152
22402
21255
30179
7408
115
1591
1006
32263
1332
12636
4099
386
29231
25711
10913
8132
20844
13150
18184
19066
29963
1000
23CF
5791
03C6
376D
71DE
4745
06B4
2E8B
51F5
6076
2E59
18F1
6CF8
6298
789D
779A
6705
013A
446E
55A7
08C5
46B9
2258
53C0
3C85
6835
2C23
2F31
5D19
4F39
29B4
4255
7CDC
6921
3700
5D22
6A3D
5995
760C
309B
4D8E
39FA
3A9E
02BE
537D
5D42
0D8C
7A5B
7252
40AA
1000
0623
1D3C
18AF
098F
5F79
6AD7
5C3D
7150
160B
6DB5
4718
5292
55B1
6286
006D
178C
5612
3ADD
123F
76E2
2D5F
4D7E
3979
00F1
5E13
1DC5
4AC8
0417
6628
5782
5307
75E3
1CF0
0073
0637
03EE
7E07
0534
315C
1003
0182
722F
646F
2AA1
1FC4
516C
335E
4708
4A7A
750B
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-3
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
28195
3557
24281
29717
14106
26649
30545
19658
10080
31396
13291
23592
19547
7637
31974
8170
13526
19383
5310
7989
13983
18831
768
22511
22834
8944
18510
3753
13813
27922
27597
26107
30214
9304
24511
11584
11733
7966
12899
14067
14012
23951
10754
13169
8593
11231
1954
12695
26537
4810
2335
7336
30543
10305
17051
23386
9213
11363
17411
29884
2898
28386
2264
17583
5147
8523
3923
5381
6907
8427
20401
4887
24909
1586
19046
26541
28472
3531
3766
32719
7122
30966
15204
2547
8111
17351
87
12765
1160
25368
24804
1302
913
29310
20629
19250
12500
27973
22201
4335
6E23
0DE5
5ED9
7415
371A
6819
7751
4CCA
2760
7AA4
33EB
5C28
4C5B
1DD5
7CE6
1FEA
34D6
4BB7
14BE
1F35
369F
498F
0300
57EF
5932
22F0
484E
0EA9
35F5
6D12
6BCD
65FB
7606
2458
5FBF
2D40
2DD5
1F1E
3263
36F3
36BC
5D8F
2A02
3371
2191
2BDF
07A2
3197
67A9
12CA
091F
1CA8
774F
2841
429B
5B5A
23FD
2C63
4403
74BC
0B52
6EE2
08D8
44AF
141B
214B
0F53
1505
1AFB
20EB
4FB1
1317
614D
0632
4A66
67AD
6F38
0DCB
0EB6
7FCF
1BD2
78F6
3B64
09F3
1FAF
43C7
0057
31DD
0488
6318
60E4
0516
0391
727E
5095
4B32
30D4
6D45
56B9
10EF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
22575
31456
8148
19043
25438
10938
2311
7392
30714
180
8948
16432
9622
7524
1443
1810
6941
3238
8141
10408
18826
22705
3879
21359
30853
18078
15910
20989
28810
30759
18899
7739
6279
9968
8571
4143
19637
11867
7374
10423
9984
7445
4133
22646
15466
2164
16380
15008
31755
31636
6605
29417
22993
27657
5468
8821
20773
4920
5756
28088
740
23397
19492
26451
30666
15088
26131
15969
24101
12762
19997
22971
12560
31213
18780
16353
12055
30396
24388
1555
13316
31073
6187
21644
9289
4624
467
18133
1532
1457
9197
13451
25785
4087
31190
8383
12995
27438
9297
1676
582F
7AE0
1FD4
4A63
635E
2ABA
0907
1CE0
77FA
00B4
22F4
4030
2596
1D64
05A3
0712
1B1D
0CA6
1FCD
28A8
498A
58B1
0F27
536F
7885
469E
3E26
51FD
708A
7827
49D3
1E3B
1887
26F0
217B
102F
4CB5
2E5B
1CCE
28B7
2700
1D15
1025
5876
3C6A
0874
3FFC
3AA0
7C0B
7B94
19CD
72E9
59D1
6C09
155C
2275
5125
1338
167C
6DB8
02E4
5B65
4C24
6753
77CA
3AF0
6613
3E61
5E25
31DA
4E1D
59BB
3110
79ED
495C
3FE1
2F17
76BC
5F44
0613
3404
7961
182B
548C
2449
1210
01D3
46D5
05FC
05B1
23ED
348B
64B9
0FF7
79D6
20BF
32C3
6B2E
2451
068C
. . . continued on next page
E-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23933
8438
8517
28314
25692
4191
2812
712
6517
7841
25918
16756
15116
23902
13558
2119
2564
7423
6512
17680
15862
19241
24953
21390
1145
27727
6044
3861
13656
11565
297
12902
27970
28276
22482
28791
15777
4382
20439
6714
8829
19329
31479
24994
22969
11646
21344
14327
3175
8385
645
18087
19577
23015
16406
4489
32729
1565
15703
3111
10170
12547
11690
5463
25262
15817
18085
20324
31470
31726
20965
11169
13775
11048
11568
23023
19554
468
3136
16223
21573
24342
32326
10534
28789
17496
20271
22933
2451
19935
7202
8991
9783
1485
25403
7579
14547
20346
27477
11794
5D7D
20F6
2145
6E9A
645C
105F
0AFC
02C8
1975
1EA1
653E
4174
3B0C
5D5E
34F6
0847
0A04
1CFF
1970
4510
3DF6
4B29
6179
538E
0479
6C4F
179C
0F15
3558
2D2D
0129
3266
6D42
6E74
57D2
7077
3DA1
111E
4FD7
1A3A
227D
4B81
7AF7
61A2
59B9
2D7E
5360
37F7
0C67
20C1
0285
46A7
4C79
59E7
4016
1189
7FD9
061D
3D57
0C27
27BA
3103
2DAA
1557
62AE
3DC9
46A5
4F64
7AEE
7BEE
51E5
2BA1
35CF
2B28
2D30
59EF
4C62
01D4
0C40
3F5F
5445
5F16
7E46
2926
7075
4458
4F2F
5995
0993
4DDF
1C22
231F
2637
05CD
633B
1D9B
38D3
4F7A
6B55
2E12
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
25414
7102
20516
19495
17182
11572
25570
6322
8009
26708
6237
32520
31627
3532
24090
20262
18238
2033
25566
25144
29679
5064
27623
13000
31373
13096
26395
15487
29245
26729
12568
24665
8923
19634
29141
73
26482
6397
29818
8153
302
28136
29125
8625
26671
6424
12893
18502
7765
25483
12596
19975
20026
8958
19143
17142
19670
30191
5822
22076
606
9741
9116
12705
17502
18952
15502
17819
4370
31955
30569
7350
26356
32189
1601
19537
25667
4415
2303
16362
28620
6736
2777
24331
9042
107
4779
13065
30421
20210
5651
31017
30719
23104
7799
17865
26951
25073
32381
16581
6346
1BBE
5024
4C27
431E
2D34
63E2
18B2
1F49
6854
185D
7F08
7B8B
0DCC
5E1A
4F26
473E
07F1
63DE
6238
73EF
13C8
6BE7
32C8
7A8D
3328
671B
3C7F
723D
6869
3118
6059
22DB
4CB2
71D5
0049
6772
18FD
747A
1FD9
012E
6DE8
71C5
21B1
682F
1918
325D
4846
1E55
638B
3134
4E07
4E3A
22FE
4AC7
42F6
4CD6
75EF
16BE
563C
025E
260D
239C
31A1
445E
4A08
3C8E
459B
1112
7CD3
7769
1CB6
66F4
7DBD
0641
4C51
6443
113F
08FF
3FEA
6FCC
1A50
0AD9
5F0B
2352
006B
12AB
3309
76D5
4EF2
1613
7929
77FF
5A40
1E77
45C9
6947
61F1
7E7D
40C5
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-5
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
7363
25594
10678
18026
14483
11449
21128
15005
21838
25797
14870
23232
32747
840
25426
12856
29766
25939
28040
5748
639
27761
26921
10236
2908
15135
11094
3091
28406
7023
20176
30481
26763
6676
32048
27701
17686
12727
9305
3184
24247
3865
11738
20588
30874
10260
31618
20223
31635
15560
5439
15530
29297
5748
25036
4793
10492
30054
3649
9467
25356
32310
25534
3882
7259
10817
5773
13227
7969
4525
18483
379
8264
27127
5104
8849
24150
14317
19955
10172
13348
18609
22879
15971
23864
4819
30181
6615
25960
19007
24355
7926
20802
3037
29498
7940
27125
4333
408
26030
1CC3
63FA
29B6
466A
3893
2CB9
5288
3A9D
554E
64C5
3A16
5AC0
7FEB
0348
6352
3238
7446
6553
6D88
1674
027F
6C71
6929
27FC
0B5C
3B1F
2B56
0C13
6EF6
1B6F
4ED0
7711
688B
1A14
7D30
6C35
4516
31B7
2459
0C70
5EB7
0F19
2DDA
506C
789A
2814
7B82
4EFF
7B93
3CC8
153F
3CAA
7271
1674
61CC
12B9
28FC
7566
0E41
24FB
630C
7E36
63BE
0F2A
1C5B
2A41
168D
33AB
1F21
11AD
4833
017B
2048
69F7
13F0
2291
5E56
37ED
4DF3
27BC
3424
48B1
595F
3E63
5D38
12D3
75E5
19D7
6568
4A3F
5F23
1EF6
5142
0BDD
733A
1F04
69F5
10ED
0198
65AE
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
15408
6414
8164
10347
29369
10389
24783
18400
22135
4625
22346
2545
7786
20209
26414
1478
15122
24603
677
13705
13273
14879
6643
23138
28838
9045
10792
25666
11546
15535
16134
8360
14401
26045
24070
30300
13602
32679
16267
9063
19487
12778
27309
12527
953
15958
6068
23577
32156
32709
32087
97
7618
93
16052
14300
11129
6602
14460
25458
15869
27047
26808
7354
27834
11250
552
27058
14808
9642
32253
26081
21184
11748
32676
2425
19455
19889
18177
2492
15086
30632
27549
6911
9937
2467
25831
32236
12987
11714
19283
11542
27928
26637
10035
10748
24429
29701
14997
32235
3C30
190E
1FE4
286B
72B9
2895
60CF
47E0
5677
1211
574A
09F1
1E6A
4EF1
672E
05C6
3B12
601B
02A5
3589
33D9
3A1F
19F3
5A62
70A6
2355
2A28
6442
2D1A
3CAF
3F06
20A8
3841
65BD
5E06
765C
3522
7FA7
3F8B
2367
4C1F
31EA
6AAD
30EF
03B9
3E56
17B4
5C19
7D9C
7FC5
7D57
0061
1DC2
005D
3EB4
37DC
2B79
19CA
387C
6372
3DFD
69A7
68B8
1CBA
6CBA
2BF2
0228
69B2
39D8
25AA
7DFD
65E1
52C0
2DE4
7FA4
0979
4BFF
4DB1
4701
09BC
3AEE
77A8
6B9D
1AFF
26D1
09A3
64E7
7DEC
32BB
2DC2
4B53
2D16
6D18
680D
2733
29FC
5F6D
7405
3A95
7DEB
. . . continued on next page
E-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
1849
8161
29658
10865
8904
15034
18736
26360
30233
19154
6683
12866
9932
23537
31881
14121
24033
20750
10673
6628
9236
25468
28021
21490
23218
15773
27540
9073
24998
20935
1601
31729
24390
24760
24103
26211
22639
24225
8864
19959
15488
13188
29931
9580
1900
16873
6459
9821
24900
31435
30593
6539
5230
8795
27046
9994
17154
28998
3012
10260
28763
31963
31517
3307
5485
17663
28499
8032
15807
2330
21792
28389
16973
32268
17903
23984
17822
22682
25977
7525
8225
30785
1008
28604
20680
30086
1800
17980
20339
10387
25079
31578
9694
12639
23724
32051
21547
1077
21733
13823
0739
1FE1
73DA
2A71
22C8
3ABA
4930
66F8
7619
4AD2
1A1B
3242
26CC
5BF1
7C89
3729
5DE1
510E
29B1
19E4
2414
637C
6D75
53F2
5AB2
3D9D
6B94
2371
61A6
51C7
0641
7BF1
5F46
60B8
5E27
6663
586F
5EA1
22A0
4DF7
3C80
3384
74EB
256C
076C
41E9
193B
265D
6144
7ACB
7781
198B
146E
225B
69A6
270A
4302
7146
0BC4
2814
705B
7CDB
7B1D
0CEB
156D
44FF
6F53
1F60
3DBF
091A
5520
6EE5
424D
7E0C
45EF
5DB0
459E
589A
6579
1D65
2021
7841
03F0
6FBC
50C8
7586
0708
463C
4F73
2893
61F7
7B5A
25DE
315F
5CAC
7D33
542B
0435
54E5
35FF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23557
17638
3545
9299
6323
19590
7075
14993
19916
6532
17317
16562
26923
9155
20243
32391
20190
27564
20869
9791
714
7498
23278
8358
9468
23731
25133
2470
17501
24671
11930
9154
7388
3440
27666
22888
13194
26710
7266
15175
15891
26692
14757
28757
31342
19435
2437
20573
18781
18948
30766
5985
6823
20973
10197
9618
22705
5234
12541
8019
22568
5221
25216
1354
29335
6682
26128
29390
8852
6110
11847
10239
6955
10897
14076
12450
8954
19709
1252
15142
26958
8759
12696
11936
25635
17231
22298
7330
30758
6933
2810
8820
7831
19584
2944
19854
10456
17036
2343
14820
5C05
44E6
0DD9
2453
18B3
4C86
1BA3
3A91
4DCC
1984
43A5
40B2
692B
23C3
4F13
7E87
4EDE
6BAC
5185
263F
02CA
1D4A
5AEE
20A6
24FC
5CB3
622D
09A6
445D
605F
2E9A
23C2
1CDC
0D70
6C12
5968
338A
6856
1C62
3B47
3E13
6844
39A5
7055
7A6E
4BEB
0985
505D
495D
4A04
782E
1761
1AA7
51ED
27D5
2592
58B1
1472
30FD
1F53
5828
1465
6280
054A
7297
1A1A
6610
72CE
2294
17DE
2E47
27FF
1B2B
2A91
36FC
30A2
22FA
4CFD
04E4
3B26
694E
2237
3198
2EA0
6423
434F
571A
1CA2
7826
1B15
0AFA
2274
1E97
4C80
0B80
4D8E
28D8
428C
0927
39E4
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-7
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6952
13599
22242
8410
31287
3425
7717
9666
4259
7349
10738
27221
11992
956
26087
20348
22084
10217
28949
27786
8430
4161
14265
13467
9403
10108
17374
16887
9342
4110
23690
17174
15816
13724
18832
28042
4683
17968
10729
3233
16451
13359
1615
26444
26184
23699
8669
5916
18327
20400
528
19710
18507
18327
20298
17005
20444
1179
14175
15599
22617
4431
16999
16565
14287
32574
17857
25907
29100
3556
31111
5189
21328
17470
6264
25451
26323
1784
32150
30538
25033
23345
12630
8042
13014
14926
7489
6091
32551
7919
2668
25730
26132
29940
25734
24622
13030
4982
31887
1647
1B28
351F
56E2
20DA
7A37
0D61
1E25
25C2
10A3
1CB5
29F2
6A55
2ED8
03BC
65E7
4F7C
5644
27E9
7115
6C8A
20EE
1041
37B9
349B
24BB
277C
43DE
41F7
247E
100E
5C8A
4316
3DC8
359C
4990
6D8A
124B
4630
29E9
0CA1
4043
342F
064F
674C
6648
5C93
21DD
171C
4797
4FB0
0210
4CFE
484B
4797
4F4A
426D
4FDC
049B
375F
3CEF
5859
114F
4267
40B5
37CF
7F3E
45C1
6533
71AC
0DE4
7987
1445
5350
443E
1878
636B
66D3
06F8
7D96
774A
61C9
5B31
3156
1F6A
32D6
3A4E
1D41
17CB
7F27
1EEF
0A6C
6482
6614
74F4
6486
602E
32E6
1376
7C8F
066F
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23393
5619
17052
21292
2868
19538
24294
22895
27652
29905
21415
1210
22396
26552
24829
8663
991
21926
23306
13646
148
24836
24202
9820
12939
2364
14820
2011
13549
28339
25759
11116
31448
27936
3578
12371
12721
10264
25344
13246
544
9914
4601
16234
24475
26318
6224
13381
30013
22195
1756
19068
28716
31958
16097
1308
3320
16682
6388
12828
3518
3494
6458
10717
8463
27337
19846
9388
21201
31422
166
28622
6477
10704
25843
25406
21523
8569
9590
22466
12455
27506
21847
28392
1969
30715
23674
22629
12857
30182
21880
6617
27707
16249
24754
31609
22689
3226
4167
25624
5B61
15F3
429C
532C
0B34
4C52
5EE6
596F
6C04
74D1
53A7
04BA
577C
67B8
60FD
21D7
03DF
55A6
5B0A
354E
0094
6104
5E8A
265C
328B
093C
39E4
07DB
34ED
6EB3
649F
2B6C
7AD8
6D20
0DFA
3053
31B1
2818
6300
33BE
0220
26BA
11F9
3F6A
5F9B
66CE
1850
3445
753D
56B3
06DC
4A7C
702C
7CD6
3EE1
051C
0CF8
412A
18F4
321C
0DBE
0DA6
193A
29DD
210F
6AC9
4D86
24AC
52D1
7ABE
00A6
6FCE
194D
29D0
64F3
633E
5413
2179
2576
57C2
30A7
6B72
5557
6EE8
07B1
77FB
5C7A
5865
3239
75E6
5578
19D9
6C3B
3F79
60B2
7B79
58A1
0C9A
1047
6418
. . . continued on next page
E-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
8709
7476
26
13627
7532
5471
20844
19007
32357
26066
30405
8043
12187
17064
14682
12780
26348
24479
28336
13167
7380
7564
14956
2122
16713
4681
16911
28070
18745
9675
21392
14652
23068
10834
14024
5048
11694
7771
32566
1342
9509
24606
22804
27969
14724
24682
5923
27373
5294
16077
29906
20593
17473
5121
14026
7357
9775
4433
21468
5449
29461
26677
639
22639
15696
18098
7449
24823
20817
24474
12081
16971
31531
8436
4536
6483
14443
12559
10212
17176
26311
6186
6974
31729
4076
8677
27881
7189
16562
32090
17821
5173
6600
15201
16507
1541
10699
15552
12136
31429
2205
1D34
001A
353B
1D6C
155F
516C
4A3F
7E65
65D2
76C5
1F6B
2F9B
42A8
395A
31EC
66EC
5F9F
6EB0
336F
1CD4
1D8C
3A6C
084A
4149
1249
420F
6DA6
4939
25CB
5390
393C
5A1C
2A52
36C8
13B8
2DAE
1E5B
7F36
053E
2525
601E
5914
6D41
3984
606A
1723
6AED
14AE
3ECD
74D2
5071
4441
1401
36CA
1CBD
262F
1151
53DC
1549
7315
6835
027F
586F
3D50
46B2
1D19
60F7
5151
5F9A
2F31
424B
7B2B
20F4
11B8
1953
386B
310F
27E4
4318
66C7
182A
1B3E
7BF1
0FEC
21E5
6CE9
1C15
40B2
7D5A
459D
1435
19C8
3B61
407B
0605
29CB
3CC0
2F68
7AC5
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
30380
15337
10716
13592
2412
15453
13810
12956
30538
10814
18939
19767
20547
29720
31831
26287
11310
25724
21423
5190
258
13978
4670
23496
23986
839
11296
30913
27297
10349
32504
18405
3526
19161
23831
21380
4282
32382
806
6238
10488
19507
27288
2390
19094
13860
9225
2505
27806
2408
10924
23096
22683
10955
17117
15837
22647
10700
30293
5579
11057
30238
14000
22860
27172
307
20380
26427
10702
30024
14018
4297
13938
25288
27294
31835
8228
12745
6746
1456
27743
27443
31045
12225
21482
14678
30656
13721
21831
30208
9995
3248
12030
5688
2082
23143
25906
15902
21084
25723
76AC
3BE9
29DC
3518
096C
3C5D
35F2
329C
774A
2A3E
49FB
4D37
5043
7418
7C57
66AF
2C2E
647C
53AF
1446
0102
369A
123E
5BC8
5DB2
0347
2C20
78C1
6AA1
286D
7EF8
47E5
0DC6
4AD9
5D17
5384
10BA
7E7E
0326
185E
28F8
4C33
6A98
0956
4A96
3624
2409
09C9
6C9E
0968
2AAC
5A38
589B
2ACB
42DD
3DDD
5877
29CC
7655
15CB
2B31
761E
36B0
594C
6A24
0133
4F9C
673B
29CE
7548
36C2
10C9
3672
62C8
6A9E
7C5B
2024
31C9
1A5A
05B0
6C5F
6B33
7945
2FC1
53EA
3956
77C0
3599
5547
7600
270B
0CB0
2EFE
1638
0822
5A67
6532
3E1E
525C
647B
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-9
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14786
18538
17703
112
17993
11411
1467
13846
16958
23649
11049
1320
2204
51
13816
9823
25979
16004
24240
20631
12637
8105
18279
16763
29822
6055
10769
17785
6516
19822
5833
25528
2504
16209
31391
5871
11273
30722
20882
22601
4368
21354
9012
7766
13435
2952
32346
18600
11739
931
2789
31869
5331
5542
15549
8204
3181
19315
7366
11372
738
24130
10559
11099
11015
23041
12901
1248
15644
12124
21959
11577
6697
903
28593
5428
31857
7837
17385
14548
1519
20982
32742
27076
30311
16366
27126
23618
32041
17322
6107
26575
15957
28967
5638
10313
20207
19207
20580
5409
39C2
486A
4527
0070
4649
2C93
05BB
3616
423E
5C61
2B29
0528
089C
0033
35F8
265F
657B
3E84
5EB0
5097
315D
1FA9
4767
417B
747E
17A7
2A11
4579
1974
4D6E
16C9
63B8
09C8
3F51
7A9F
16EF
2C09
7802
5192
5849
1110
536A
2334
1E56
347B
0B88
7E5A
48A8
2DDB
03A3
0AE5
7C7D
14D3
15A6
3CBD
200C
0C6D
4B73
1CC6
2C6C
02E2
5E42
293F
2B5B
2B07
5A01
3265
04E0
3D1C
2F5C
55C7
2D39
1A29
0387
6FB1
1534
7C71
1E9D
43E9
38D4
05EF
51F6
7FE6
69C4
7667
3FEE
69F6
5C42
7D29
43AA
17DB
67CF
3E55
7127
1606
2849
4EEF
4B07
5064
1521
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13347
7885
6669
8187
18145
14109
14231
27606
783
6301
5067
15383
1392
7641
25700
25259
19813
20933
638
16318
6878
1328
14744
22800
25919
4795
18683
32658
1586
27208
17517
599
16253
8685
29972
22128
19871
19405
17972
8599
10142
26834
23710
27280
6570
7400
26374
22218
29654
13043
13427
31084
24023
23931
15836
6085
30324
27561
13821
269
28663
29619
2043
6962
29119
22947
9612
18698
16782
29735
2136
8086
10553
11900
19996
5641
28328
25617
26986
5597
14078
13247
499
30469
17544
28510
23196
13384
4239
20725
6466
28465
19981
16723
4522
678
15320
29116
5388
22845
3423
1ECD
1A0D
1FFB
46E1
371D
3797
6BD6
030F
189D
13CB
3C17
0570
1DD9
6464
62AB
4D65
51C5
027E
3FBE
1ADE
0530
3998
5910
653F
12BB
48FB
7F92
0632
6A48
446D
0257
3F7D
21ED
7514
5670
4D9F
4BCD
4634
2197
279E
68D2
5C9E
6A90
19AA
1CE8
6706
56CA
73D6
32F3
3473
796C
5DD7
5D7B
3DDC
17C5
7674
6BA9
35FD
010D
6FF7
73B3
07FB
1B32
71BF
59A3
258C
490A
418E
7427
0858
1F96
2939
2E7C
4E1C
1609
6EA8
6411
696A
15DD
36FE
33BF
01F3
7705
4488
6F5E
5A9C
3448
108F
50F5
1942
6F31
4E0D
4153
11AA
02A6
3BD8
71BC
150C
593D
. . . continued on next page
E-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
2925
2776
18758
11504
13818
8800
8500
31516
15160
14120
3630
8953
2941
11040
17947
11541
29661
30207
15951
30079
30413
3991
31205
5002
19353
19443
14465
2430
6554
32480
30433
21733
6686
27123
32260
20908
9980
14841
28014
13574
13353
2574
2108
2881
20906
10941
22153
103
14399
16201
11537
10125
21166
30407
21767
5536
14746
17687
16485
6078
31799
30746
14435
15739
14265
12417
24453
28984
18447
8717
6089
31802
15846
12692
9454
12908
18214
29433
16697
19635
28183
20721
8056
10531
14845
24050
9507
25858
5926
13202
30175
16262
14322
5114
11768
27906
32652
13533
6870
21703
0B6D
0AD8
4946
2CF0
35FA
2260
2134
7B1C
3B38
3728
0E2E
22F9
0B7D
2B20
461B
2D15
73DD
75FF
3E4F
757F
76CD
0F97
79E5
138A
4B99
4BF3
3881
097E
199A
7EE0
76E1
54E5
1A1E
69F3
7E04
51AC
26FC
39F9
6D6E
3506
3429
0A0E
083C
0B41
51AA
2ABD
5689
0067
383F
3F49
2D11
278D
52AE
76C7
5507
15A0
399A
4517
4065
17BE
7C37
781A
3863
3D7B
37B9
3081
5F85
7138
480F
220D
17C9
7C3A
3DE6
3194
24EE
326C
4726
72F9
4139
4CB3
6E17
50F1
1F78
2923
39FD
5DF2
2523
6502
1726
3392
75DF
3F86
37F2
13FA
2DF8
6D02
7F8C
34DD
1AD6
54C7
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
24457
17161
21314
28728
22162
26259
22180
2266
10291
26620
19650
14236
11482
25289
12011
13892
17336
10759
26816
31065
8578
24023
16199
22310
30402
16613
13084
3437
1703
22659
26896
1735
16178
19166
665
20227
24447
16771
27209
6050
29088
7601
4905
5915
6169
21303
28096
8905
26997
15047
28430
8660
2659
8803
19690
22169
8511
17393
11336
13576
22820
13344
20107
8013
18835
16793
9818
4673
13609
10054
10988
14744
17930
25452
11334
15451
11362
2993
11012
5806
20180
8932
23878
20760
32764
32325
25993
3268
25180
12149
10193
9128
7843
25474
11356
11226
16268
14491
8366
26009
5F89
4309
5342
7038
5692
6693
56A4
08DA
2833
67FC
4CC2
379C
2CDA
62C9
2EEB
3644
43B8
2A07
68C0
7959
2182
5DD7
3F47
5726
76C2
40E5
331C
0D6D
06A7
5883
6910
06C7
3F32
4ADE
0299
4F03
5F7F
4183
6A49
17A2
71A0
1DB1
1329
171B
1819
5337
6DC0
22C9
6975
3AC7
6F0E
21D4
0A63
2263
4CEA
5699
213F
43F1
2C48
3508
5924
3420
4E8B
1F4D
4993
4199
265A
1241
3529
2746
2AEC
3998
460A
636C
2C46
3C5B
2C62
0BB1
2B04
16AE
4ED4
22E4
5D46
5118
7FFC
7E45
6589
0CC4
625C
2F75
27D1
23A8
1EA3
6382
2C5C
2BDA
3F8C
389B
20AE
6599
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-11
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19355
20428
31950
19686
31762
6495
18834
27061
22020
936
19553
27422
32560
2431
19029
3351
21549
26145
30737
10138
24748
30625
16897
28955
28727
6624
11370
18499
17892
15171
13933
17275
4404
6372
5809
13581
29477
27592
15946
11982
11781
1482
9104
7514
31510
12283
9497
6804
13746
5853
1842
24685
7657
29014
4908
2222
2832
3679
13632
14064
15084
29877
18580
8455
26301
24027
22325
27539
5036
21399
13874
360
29711
13820
20159
12367
28239
10189
12558
26710
7328
31547
14364
12546
25112
19183
32594
7679
27801
22157
16365
9561
8435
23341
9200
27039
19956
27945
3719
6469
4B9B
4FCC
7CCE
4CE6
7C12
195F
4992
69B5
5604
03A8
4C61
6B1E
7F30
097F
4A55
0D17
542D
6621
7811
279A
60AC
77A1
4201
711B
7037
19E0
2C6A
4843
45E4
3B43
366D
437B
1134
18E4
16B1
350D
7325
6BC8
3E4A
2ECE
2E05
05CA
2390
1D5A
7B16
2FFB
2519
1A94
35B2
16DD
0732
606D
1DE9
7156
132C
08AE
0B10
0E5F
3540
36F0
3AEC
74B5
4894
2107
66BD
5DDB
5735
6B93
13AC
5397
3632
0168
740F
35FC
4EBF
304F
6E4F
27CD
310E
6856
1CA0
7B3B
381C
3102
6218
4AEF
7F52
1DFF
6C99
568D
3FED
2559
20F3
5B2D
23F0
699F
4DF4
6D29
0E87
1945
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17460
17629
10461
21618
11498
193
16140
13419
10864
28935
18765
27644
21564
5142
1211
1203
5199
16945
4883
25040
7119
17826
4931
25705
10726
17363
2746
10952
19313
29756
14297
21290
1909
8994
13295
21590
26468
13636
5207
29493
18992
12567
12075
26658
21077
15595
4921
14051
5956
21202
5164
17126
21566
21845
28149
9400
19459
7190
3101
491
25497
29807
26508
4442
4871
31141
9864
12589
5417
8549
14288
8503
20357
15381
18065
24678
23858
7610
18097
20918
7238
30549
16320
20853
26736
10327
24404
7931
5310
554
27311
6865
7762
15761
12697
24850
15259
24243
30508
13982
4434
44DD
28DD
5472
2CEA
00C1
3F0C
346B
2A70
7107
494D
6BFC
543C
1416
04BB
04B3
144F
4231
1313
61D0
1BCF
45A2
1343
6469
29E6
43D3
0ABA
2AC8
4B71
743C
37D9
532A
0775
2322
33EF
5456
6764
3544
1457
7335
4A30
3117
2F2B
6822
5255
3CEB
1339
36E3
1744
52D2
142C
42E6
543E
5555
6DF5
24B8
4C03
1C16
0C1D
01EB
6399
746F
678C
115A
1307
79A5
2688
312D
1529
2165
37D0
2137
4F85
3C15
4691
6066
5D32
1DBA
46B1
51B6
1C46
7755
3FC0
5175
6870
2857
5F54
1EFB
14BE
022A
6AAF
1AD1
1E52
3D91
3199
6112
3B9B
5EB3
772C
369E
. . . continued on next page
E-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19006
11690
5669
21513
11695
19860
3265
10226
6113
529
6013
9636
29870
4263
27985
18539
30279
3646
10370
13997
1112
17257
4A3E
2DAA
1625
5409
2DAF
4D94
0CC1
27F2
17E1
0211
177D
25A4
74AE
10A7
6D51
486B
7647
0E3E
2882
36AD
0458
4369
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
11239
30038
30222
13476
2497
31842
24342
25857
27662
24594
16790
25039
24086
21581
21346
28187
23231
18743
11594
7198
105
4534
2BE7
7556
760E
34A4
09C1
7C62
5F16
6501
6C0E
6012
4196
61CF
5E16
544D
5362
6E1B
5ABF
4937
2D4A
1C1E
0069
11B6
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-13
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Notes
E-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Appendix Content
08/01/2001
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating HP437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542 power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F-1
F-1
F-5
F-6
F-6
F-6
F-7
F-9
F-9
F-10
F-12
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-14
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
F-14
F-18
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Preparation
Purpose
This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS
interface, the HP8935, the Advantest R3465, and the HP437 and
Gigatronics 8542 power meters. The Cybertest test set doesn’t require
any setup.
HP8921A Test Equipment
Connections
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-4). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium Reference
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
SYNTH REF IN
10 MHZ OUT
08/01/2001
Connector Type
83236A PCS
HPIB INTERFACE
REF IN
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
45–pin custom BUS
BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB cable
BNC–male – BNC–male
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP–IB
FW00368
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
F-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ INPUT
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
Connector Type
83236A PCS
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
REF IN
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ OUT
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
45–pin custom BUS
BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB cable
BNC–male – BNC–male
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-3
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference
10 MHZ WITH
RUBIDIUM STANDARD
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP–IB
FW00369
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
F-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-3 to verify that the connections
between the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are
intact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of each
instrument.
IMPORTANT
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
Table F-3: System Connectivity
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the
connectivity setup.
Do the following when the test is complete,
S position cursor on STOP TEST and select it
S OR press the [K5] pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-5
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Setting HP8921A and
HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address
Step
Action
If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.
Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.
S HP8921A HP–IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure
on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).
S HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Pretest Setup for HP8935
Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.
Press the Push to Select knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
F-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Advantest R3465 Connection
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
SERIAL I/O
R3465
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00370
GPIB
CONNECTOR
08/01/2001
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-7
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
FROM 10 MHZ
RUBIDIUM REFERENCE
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
SERIAL I/O
R3465/3463
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00371
GPIB
CONNECTOR
F-8
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock
setup
Table F-7 describes the steps to set the GPIB address and clock for the
Advantest R3465 equipment.
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup
Step
Action
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:
S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
S Push the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)
– Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
– If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to
enter)
Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if
required)
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
S Push the Date/Time CRT menu key
S If required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier
knob to enter)
S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
Pretest Setup for Advantest
R3465
Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346
Step
Action
Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.
Press the RESET button.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-9
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Calibrating HP437 Power Meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-9 to enter information unique to the
power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-5 as
required.
IMPORTANT
This procedure must be done in conjunction with the
automated calibration to enter power sensor specific
calibration values.
Figure F-5: Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE SHIFT '
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER TURNED OFF
FW00308
Table F-9: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.
– Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.
– Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to
warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
F-10
Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:
– To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET] .
– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].
– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].
– To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Table F-9: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:
– Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.
– Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button to
select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
NOTE
Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT
displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.
Press [ZERO] . Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.
Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.
To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then ['].
– Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.
Perform the following to set the REF CF %:
– Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO] ) for CAL.
– Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.
Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:
– Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
– On the sensor's decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enter
the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and
0.10 is normal.)
10
To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then ['].
– Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-11
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542
power meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-10 to enter information unique to the power
sensor.
Table F-10: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the calibration procedure.
S Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.
S Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
S Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.
Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:
Press MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.
Use the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.
Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C or 8542C (as appropriate).
Press ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.
Press ENTER.
S Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.
S Press ZERO.
S Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.
S Disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.
F-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Figure F-6: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
AC POWER
FRONT View
GPIB CONNECTION
REAR View
FW00564
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-13
Manual Cable Calibration
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
Table F-11 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
S Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.
Press the Preset pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
If using HP83236A:
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
F-14
If using HP83236B:
Set channel frequency:
– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
– Select User Defined Frequency.
– Go Back to Previous Menu.
– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
Set RF Generator level:
– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 – 1910
MHz).
– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13
Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14
On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16
Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17
Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the
calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
S Example:
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20 dB Attenuator =
(B) Directional Coupler =
–1.4 dB
–20.1 dB
–29.8 dB
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-15
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
19
After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
S Example:
Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21
Select Continue (K2).
22
Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
23
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24
Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
S Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
–
–
–
–
under To Screen, select More
select IO CONFIG
Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
set Mode to Talk&Lstn
S Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25
F-16
Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Figure F-7: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
50 Ω
TERMINATION
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
08/01/2001
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
FW00292
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-17
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed
at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
Select the Setup CRT menu key
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
. . . continued on next page
F-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
16
Action
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-8, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= –29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-19
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Figure F-8: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
FW00320
50 Ω
TERMINATION
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-20
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix G: Download ROM Code
Appendix Content
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Procedure – Downloading Device ROM Code . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
G-1
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF
Exception Procedure –
Downloading Device ROM
Code
This procedure is not part of a normal optimization.
Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative
exists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.
NOTE
An MGLI or GLI must be INS (green) before ROM code
can be downloaded to non–GLI devices.
CAUTION
Release 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a
device loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release
2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.
All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–level
ROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATP
procedures can be performed.
If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization and
Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplished
with the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following the
optimization, the site code and software should be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessary
to perform the optimization and ATPs again after the
upgrade.
If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM code
must be used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the device
ROM code can be changed using the CDMA LMF before
the performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be converted
back to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field without
Motorola assistance.
If it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the CDMA
LMF, the procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM
code download using the CDMA LMF.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM
code files exist on the CDMA LMF for each of the devices to be loaded.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
G-1
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
CAUTION
The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded
must be the same as the Release level of the ROM code
resident in the other devices in the BTS. Release 2.9.x
ROM code must not be downloaded to a frame having
Release 2.8.x code, and Release 2.8.x code must not be
downloaded to a frame having Release 2.9.x code.
This procedure should only be used to upgrade
replacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to
upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded
from Release 2.8.x to Release 2.9.x, optimization and ATP
must first be performed with the BTS in a Release 2.8.x
configuration. Following this, the upgrade from Release
2.8.x to Release 2.9.x should be done by the CBSC.
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step
Action
Click on the device to be loaded.
From the Device pull down menu, select Status.
A status report window will appear
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This number is used as the last four digits
in the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file
can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.
Click OK to close the status window.
Click on the device to be loaded.
* IMPORTANT
The CDMA LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must
be selected manually.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code Manual.
A file selection window will appear.
Double–click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file.
Double–click the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.
. . . continued on next page
G-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step
Action
! CAUTION
A ROM code file with the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) must be chosen. Using a file
with the wrong HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.
Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Type
number noted in step 3 (e.g., file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a HW Bin
Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
10
11
Click on the Load button.
A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.
Click OK to close the status window.
12
From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.
13
14
Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download and click Save.
A pop–up message will appear showing the CDF file has been updated.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
15
Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.
NOTE
RAM code is automatically selected for download.
16
17
18
19
20
21
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code to download RAM code.
A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.
Click OK to close the status window.
Observe the downloaded device to ensure it is OOS–RAM (yellow) for non–GLI devices or INS
(green) for GLIs.
Click on the device which was loaded with code.
From the Device pull down menu, select Status.
Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the data
download portion of the Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices procedure, Table 3-15,
to download data to other device types after their ROM code has been upgraded and RAM code
downloaded.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
G-3
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
Notes
G-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Appendix H: In–Service Calibration
Appendix Content
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1X Test Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
H-1
H-1
H-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8935 series E6380A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
H-3
H-3
H-6
H-9
H-12
H-15
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In–Service Calibration for 1X Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-18
H-18
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Introduction
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to performing calibration of new BTS
expansion carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure
also supports BTS recalibration following replacement of RF chain
components while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends performing this procedure during a maintenance
window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 2–to–1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D can be calibrated while LPAs
3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D remain in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the test
equipment after it has been allowed to warm-up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any component of the test equipment set (for example, a
test cable, RF adapter, signal generator) has been replaced,
the test equipment set must be recalibrated. Failure to do so
could introduce measurement errors which ultimately result
in degradation of system performance.
1X Test Equipment
Requirements
Calibration of 1X carrier functions requires using either of the following
test equipment combinations:
S An Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with an Advantest R3562
signal generator
S An Agilent E4406A Transmitter Test Set with an Agilent E4432A
signal generator
S An Agilent 8935 series E6380A equipped with option 200 (if
purchased new) or option R2K (if retrofitted) and an Agilent E4432B
signal generator
These test equipment combinations are capable of calibrating the BTS
for both IS–95 A and B mode operation as well as IS–2000 CDMA 1X
operation.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-1
Introduction – continued
IMPORTANT
IS–95A/B communication test sets such as the
HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3561L can not calibrate 1X
carrier functions.
Calibration and test set–up for the HP 8921A/600 and Advantest
R3561L test sets is included only for situations where it is necessary to
use them for calibration of IS–95A/B mode operation.
H-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration
Power Delta Calibration
Introduction
The ISC procedure has several differences from a normal calibration
procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer/communications test set instead of a power meter to measure
power. Power meters are broadband measurement devices and cannot be
used to measure power during ISC because other carriers are operating.
A spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. Measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less accurate
than using a power meter, therefore, compensation is required for the
accuracy difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
Agilent E4406A Power Delta
Calibration
The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test
equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X as
well as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is
performed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the
reference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset
value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.
Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to perform the Agilent E4406A
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power
sensor (see Figure H-1).
Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:
– Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured
– Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad
– Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; for
example MHz
– Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero)
– Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-3
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RF
INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure H-2).
* IMPORTANT
Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following
steps.
Set the E4406A as follows:
– Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured
– Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne
– Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum
– Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency
– Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad
– Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz
– Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten
– Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
– Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile
– Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
– Using the soft keys, select Base
– Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
– Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power
On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
10
Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as
result B____________________.
11
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
. . . continued on next page
H-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
12
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Agilent measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see step 4 in
Table H-6).
Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437
Agilent E4432B and E4406A
HP437B
SENSOR
RF OUTPUT
Power
Sensor
Short RF Cable
Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A
Agilent E4432B and E4406A
RF OUTPUT
Short RF Cable
RF INPUT
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-5
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Advantest R3267 Power Delta
Calibration
The Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer and R3562 signal generator test
equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X as
well as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is
performed on the R3267. After the offset value has been calculated, add
it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table H-2 to perform the Advantest R3267
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Warm-up test equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to this procedure. After it is warmed up
and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the “Test Set Calibration” section of
Chapter 3.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located on the right side of the control panel.
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
On the CRT, select RX Control by pressing ACTIVE key 1.
On the CRT, select Frequency Setup by pressing ACTIVE key 3.
On the CRT, highlight Frequency by adjusting the DISPLAY CONTROL knob.
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad ENTRY section keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.
Set the level to 0 dBm using the keypad ENTRY section keys.
10
On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Modulation, if not press the ACTIVE key 5 to toggle it
OFF.
11
On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Output, if not press the ACTIVE key 6 to toggle it OFF.
12
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
13
Connect the RF cable from the R3562 signal generator RF OUT port to the power sensor, refer to
Figure H-3.
14
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE key 6.
15
Record the Power Meter reading as result A________________________
16
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to OFF by pressing ACTIVE key 6.
. . . continued on next page
H-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
17
Connect the RF cable from R3562 signal generator RF OUT port to the R3267 spectrum analyzer
INPUT Port, refer to Figure H-4.
18
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE key 6.
19
On the R3267, press the POWER key in the MEASUREMENT section of the control panel.
20
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.
21
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad ENTRY section keys.
22
On the CRT, select dB/div by pressing ACTIVE key 1.
23
On the CRT, select 10 dB/div by pressing ACTIVE key 1.
24
Press the FREQ key in ENTRY section of the control panel.
25
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad ENTRY section keys.
26
On the CRT, select more 1/2 by pressing ACTIVE key 7.
27
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.66G.
28
Press the POWER key in the MEASUREMENT section of the control panel.
29
Press the SPAN key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.
30
On the CRT, select Zero Span by pressing ACTIVE key 2.
31
Press the COUPLE key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.
32
On the CRT, select RBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE key 3.
33
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad ENTRY section keys.
34
On the CRT, select VBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE key 2.
35
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad ENTRY section keys.
36
Press the MKR key in the DISPLAY CONTROL section of the control panel.
37
On the CRT, select Normal Marker by pressing ACTIVE key 1.
38
Record the Marker Level reading as result B________________________
39
Press Single in ENTRY section of control panel.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-7
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.7 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dB
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see step 4 in
Table H-6).
Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437
Advantest R3562 and R3267
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
RF OUT
Short RF Cable
Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267
Advantest R3562 and R3267
RF IN
Short RF Cable
RF OUT
H-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Agilent 8935 series E6380A
Power Delta Calibration
The Agilent E6380A (formerly HP8935) communications test set
modified with either option 200 or R2K and E4432B signal generator
test equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X
as well as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is
performed on the E6380A. After the offset value has been calculated,
add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table H-3 to perform the Agilent E6380A
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF cable between the E6380A Duplex Out port and the HP437 power sensor (see
Figure H-5).
Set the E6380A signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Gen
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437 Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the E6380A signal source output, and disconnect the HP437.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source E6380A for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the E6380A Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port (see
Figure H-6).
Ensure that the source E6380A settings are the same as in Step 3.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-9
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the E6380A as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Anl Dir to Fwd
10
Turn on the E6380A signal output.
11
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
12
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring E6380A as result
B ________________________.
13
Turn off the E6380A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
14
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-6).
Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to HP437
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Agilent E6380A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00805
H-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to E6380A
Agilent E6380A
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00806
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-11
Power Delta Calibration – continued
HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration
Use the HP8921A communications test set to measure power during ISC
only for IS–95A and B operation of 800 MHz systems. After the offset
value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table H-4 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP8921A communication test
sets.
Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437 power sensor (see
Figure H-7).
Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Generator
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437 Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure H-8).
Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 3.
. . . continued on next page
H-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Analyzer Direction to Fwd
10
Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
11
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
12
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
13
Compute the delta between HP437 and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-6).
Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00801
PRELIMINARY
H-13
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to
HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A
Source HP8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00802
H-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Advantest R3465 Power Delta
Calibration
Use the Advantest R3465 spectrum analyzer to measure power during
ISC only for IS–95A and B operation. After the offset value has been
calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table H-5 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power
Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA signal generator RF OUT port to the power sensor,
refer to Figure H-9.
12
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
13
Record the Power Meter reading as result A________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L signal generator RF OUT port to the R3465 INPUT Port,
refer to Figure H-10.
16
Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-15
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
20
Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22
Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
25
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
30
Press the return CRT menu key.
31
Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33
Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38
Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as result B________________________.
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-6).
H-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437
Advantest
RF OUT
R3561L
Power
Sensor
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465
RF OUT
R3561L
Short RF Cable
R3465
INPUT
FW00804
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-17
In–Service Calibration
In–Service Calibration for 1X
Upgrade
IMPORTANT
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time.
The system has no safe–guards to prevent actions which
will put the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this
procedure during a maintenance window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise
the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion
hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
S Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
S The expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC MM.
S The site specific CDF (with the expansion hardware) and CAL files
have been loaded onto the LMF.
S The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
IMPORTANT
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those
you are working on. Downloading code or data to other
cards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version
numbers required for the upgrade cards (refer to NO TAG).
If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF
SERVICE.
It is mandatory that the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf
files on the LMF computer for this BTS are copies of the
corresponding files created in the CBSC database (see
NO TAG).
The CAL file loaded on the LMF computer for this BTS
must have come from the CBSC.
S Test equipment has been configured per Figure H-11, Figure H-12,
Figure H-13, or Figure H-14.
H-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
In–Service Calibration – continued
S An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.
S Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
S A short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
S The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table H-1,
Table H-2, Table H-3, Table H-4, or Table H-5).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-19
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure H-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Agilent Test
Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Agilent E6380A (HP 8935)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ANTENNA
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
ANTENNA
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
TX
TEST
CABLE
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER WITH
UNUSED PORT
TERMINATED
RF
OUTPUT
GPIB
CABLE
RX
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
RF
INPUT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
FREQ
MONITOR
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
BNC
“T”
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
H-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure H-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Advantest R3267/R3562
Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RX
TEST
CABLE
ANTENNA
RF IN
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
ANTENNA
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
BNC
“T”
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
TX
TEST
CABLE
RF OUT
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER WITH
UNUSED PORT
TERMINATED
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
NOTE:
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
RX
CABLE
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
GPIB
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-21
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure H-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Agilent E6380A (HP 8935)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
DUPLEX OUT
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
EXT
REF
IN
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
GPIB
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX
CABLE
RF
OUTPUT
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
RF
INPUT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ON
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
BNC
“T”
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
H-22
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure H-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
RF IN
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
BNC
“T”
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF OUT
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
NOTE:
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-23
In–Service Calibration – continued
Follow the procedure in Table H-6 to perform the In–Service
Calibration.
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
– Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
– Click Tools > Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
– Check only the applicable spectrum analyzer check box on the Test Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18.
– Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
– Click the Apply button.
– Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Options window.
– Check the In–Service Calibration check box.
– Click the Apply button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
Login to the target BTS:
– Select the target BTS icon.
– Click the Login button at the login screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
– Click Util > Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
– Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL in the cable calibration pop–up
window.
– Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
– The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util > Examine > Cable Loss.
. . . continued on next page
H-24
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the TX Cable Loss.
– Click Util > Edit > Cable Loss > TX.
– Add the value computed in Table H-4, Table H-5, or Table H-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
– Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
– Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX tests:
– Click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss > TX from the menu bar at the main window.
– Enter the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the coupler loss file, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss.
Input the Coupler Loss for the RX tests:
– Click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss > RX from the menu bar at the main window.
– Enter the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the couper loss file, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss.
If it was not previously done, have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 8, 9, and 10.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-25
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Download code and data to the target devices:
– Click Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.
– Check the appropriate code version in the pop up window and click the Save button to close.
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device > Download Code/Data to start downloading code and data.
! CAUTION
Perform the All Cal/Audit procedure on OOS devices only.
Run the All Cal/Audit procedure:
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Tests > All Cal/Audit from the menu bar at the main window.
– Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
– Leave the Verify BLO check box checked and click the OK button to start calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
10
Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):
– Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
11
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
– Click Select > Logout to close the BTS connection.
– Close the LMF window.
12
Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC (refer to Table 5-2).
13
Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
H-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Index
Numbers
10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,
1-11
10BaseT/10Base2 converter
LMF to BTS connection, 3-21
remove from BTS, 5-4
2–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-10
50–pair punchblock, 3-18
code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-16
failure report generation, 4-20
FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-19
pilot time offset, 4-13
prerequisites, 4-2
spectral purity TX mask, 4-10
test matrix/detailed optimization, B-2
waveform quality (Rho), 4-12
waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,
4-12
Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9
Abbreviated
RX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4
TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4
Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATP
ACTIVE LED
GLI, 6-31
MCC, 6-33
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-15
Battery Discharge Test, 2-16
Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-10
ALARM LED, GLI, 6-31
BBX
carrier spectral purity, 4-9
gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-1
primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,
4-7
Alarm Monitor window, 3-86
BBX2 Connector, 6-20
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-86
BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-33
All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6
BDC, pilot gain setting, 4-18
All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,
RFDS, 6-26
Bringing modules into service, prepare to leave the
site, 5-3
All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5
Broad Band Receiver. See BBX
All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5
BTS
download, 3-32
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-29
LMF connection, 3-15, 3-21
log out of session, 5-4
RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8
system software download, 3-3
when to optimize, B-1
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,
3-18
Applying AC Power, 2-12
ATP
all inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-4
automated introduction, 4-1
code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,
4-16
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-1
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FER
BTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-24
site equipage verification, 3-3
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
CDMA
allocation diagram for the North American, cellular
telephone frequency spectrum, D-4
optimization/ATP test matrix, B-1
subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional test
equipment, 1-11
BTS login
CLI environment, 3-25
General, 3-23
GUI environment, 3-24
BTS Logout
CLI environment, 3-27
GUI environment, 3-26
cdma Folder, 3-9
CDMA LMF and Logical BTS, 3-22
Create CAL File, 3-76
bts–nnn.cal File, 3-10
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
types configuration, 3-2
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,
F-2, F-4
Channel Service Unit, 3-15
Calibrate BLO, 3-65
CIO Connectors, 6-21
Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Calibrating Cables, 3-59
Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface
HP83236B, F-14
Code domain power/noise floor
acceptance test, 4-15
analyzer display, 4-17
Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-59
code Folder, 3-11
Calibration
data file calibration, BLO, 3-67
power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-12
Communication test set, rear panel, F-2, F-4
Calibration Audit failure, 6-11
calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-67
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-6
Communications test set. See Test equipment
Connect BTS E1/T1 spans, 5-5
Connect BTS T1/E1 spans, 5-5
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-48
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-5
Connector Functionality
Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-20
Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-20
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-7
Control, TX output verification, 4-3
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-8
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-5
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
5-1
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-16
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-16
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-15
Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-1
CSM, and LFR primary functions, 3-38
CSM frequency verification, 3-40
CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-29
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-15
cbsc folder, 3-11
CDF
site configuration, 3-2
Index-2
data Folder, 3-12
DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame), 2-7
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
DC Power Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-24
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-28
Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2
Devices, download. See Download
Digital Control Problems, 6-21
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-21
Files
calibration data file, BLO, 3-67
intermediate file, 4-20
Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or
equivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10
Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, test
equipment, 1-9
Folder Structure Overview, 3-9
Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9
Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1
Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-30
Documents, required, 1-12
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
Download
See also Devices
BTS, 3-32
BTS system software, 3-3
Gain set point, C-1
Generating an ATP Report, 4-20
Download BLO Procedure, 3-73
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
Download from the CBSC, prepare to leave the site,
5-3
download ROM and RAM code, G-2
Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-13
GLI Connector, 6-20
GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-20
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-37
GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-31
Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-34
GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-32
Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10
GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-32
GPIB, F-1, F-5, F-7
cables, 1-8
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-14
Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-36
GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
GPS Initialization/Verification
estimated position accuracy, 3-41
surveyed position accuracy, 3-41
End LMF session, 5-4
Equipment Overview, 1-15
GPS satellite system, 3-37
Equipment warm-up, 3-50
establish MMI communication, 3-27
Group Line Interface. See GLI
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-29
transceiver, 1-7
Hardware Requirements, 1-6
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional
test equipment, 1-11
Ethernet LAN termination, 2-3
Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-26
High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required test
equipment, 1-9
HP 83236A, F-5
Failure report generation, 4-20
HP 8921A/600 test set, 1-8
FER, acceptance test, 4-19
HP8921A, F-5
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-3
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-38
Logging Into a BTS, 3-23
Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9
Logging Out, 3-25
HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminal
connection, 3-7
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification, 3-46
HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-7
LPA Module LED, 6-34
LPA errors, 6-9
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-34
I and Q values, E-1
Initial HP8921A setup, F-14
Master Group Line Interface. See MGLI
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-1
MASTER LED, GLI, 6-31
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
MMI common connections, 3-28
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, B-1
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-30
GLI, 6-32
Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-20
IS–97 specification, E-1
MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-33
MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-33
MMI equipment setup, 3-28
LAN
BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-29
optional test equipment, 1-10
LAN connectors, external, 2-3
Module status indicators, 6-28
Multi Channel Card. See MCC
Multi–FER test Failure, 6-17
LAN termination, 2-3
LED Status Combinations for all Modules except
GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-28
New installations, 1-4
No AMR control, 6-22
LFR, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-23
LMF, F-1, F-7
BTS connection, 3-21
logout procedure, 5-4
platform requirements, 1-6
remove from BTS, 5-4
shut down UNIX, 5-4
terminal, 1-6
to BTS connection, 3-14, 3-15
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
view CDF information, 3-3
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-24
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-25
No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-22
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-21
No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-23
No or missing span line traffic, 6-23
North American, cellular telephone system frequency
spectrum, CDMA allocation, D-4
lmf Folder, 3-9
loads folder, 3-11
Local Maintenance Facility. See LMF
Online Help, 3-28
Log out
of BTS, 5-4
of LMF PC, 5-4
Optional test equipment, 1-10
10 MHz rubidium standard, 1-11
2–way splitter, 1-10
Index-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable
radiotelephone, 1-11
duplexer, 1-10
frequency counter, 1-10
LAN tester, 1-10
oscilloscope, 1-10
RF circular, 1-11
RF test cable, 1-10
spectrum analyzer, 1-10
Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-10
Prepare to leave the site
bringing modules into service, 5-3
download code and data from CBSC, 5-3
Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2
Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the
CBSC, 5-1, 6-2, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7
Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-1
Program, TSU NAM, 3-85
Pseudorandom Noise. See PN
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-33
PWR/ALM LED
BBX2, 6-33
CSM, 6-29
DC/DC Converter, 6-28
generic, 6-28
MCC, 6-33
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter
LMF to BTS connection, 3-21
remove from BTS, 5-4
Periodic optimization, 1-4
Pilot Time Offset. See PN
Pilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-13
Ping, 3-29
RAM code, described, 3-32
PN
offset programming information, E-1
offset usage, E-1
Report generation, ATP report, 4-20
PN offset per sector, E-1
PN Offset Usage , E-1
Power Input, 6-20
Power Meter
illustration, F-10
Pre–calibration, F-10
Power meter
calibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-12
illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-13
required test equipment, 1-8
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-20
Pre–calibration, Power Meter, F-10
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
Required test equipment and software, list, 1-6
RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-32
RF
attenuator, 1-9
Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11
load for required test equipment, 1-9
required test equipment load, 1-9
test cable, 1-9
RF path, fault isolation, 6-12
Prepare to leave site
connect BTS E1/T1 spans, 5-5
connect BTS T1/E1 spans, 5-5
remove external test equipment, 5-3
08/01/2001
Required test equipment
communications system analyzer, 1-6, 1-8
digital multimeter, 1-9
directional coupler, 1-9
Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-7
GPIB cables, 1-8
high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-9
power meter, 1-8
RF adapters, 1-9
RF attenuator, 1-9
RF load, 1-9
RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7
timing reference cables, 1-9
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-65
RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-26
RFDS Calibration, 3-83
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-5
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-25
Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-36
RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-33
Span Line connector , 6-20
RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-83
SPANS LED, 6-31
Rho
TX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-12
waveform quality requirements, 4-12
Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundant
BBX, 4-7
ROM code
described, 3-32
downloading, G-1
Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10
Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-10
STATUS LED, GLI, 6-31
ROM code download Caution, G-1
ROM code release level Caution, G-2
RS232 to GPIB interface
modifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7
required test equipment, 1-7
RX
acceptance tests, FER, 4-18
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-11
sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8
RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-26
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-3
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-21
SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-7
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-57
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-81
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-82
Supported Test Sets, 3-48
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-30
System Connectivity Test, F-5
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-14
Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-10
Test data sheets
Alarm verification, A-11
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
LFR receiver operation, A-6
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-11
SCLPA convergence, A-7
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-10
TX BLO, A-8
verification of test equipment used, A-1
Site, equipage verification, 3-3
Test equipment
See also Optional test equipment; Required test
equipment
set up, TX output verification/control, 4-3
system analyzer, 1-8
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
verification data sheets, A-1
Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2
Test equipment connections , F-1
Site documents, 1-12
Test Equipment Setup, 3-48
site equipage, CDF file, 3-2
Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level
Offset, 3-62, F-18
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-63
Setting Control Port, 3-15
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-64
SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-1
Site expansion, 1-4
Span line
T1/E1 verification equipment, 1-10
troubleshooting, 6-35
Index-6
Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-49
Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-69
Test Set Calibration, 3-56
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
Timing reference cables, required test equipment
Model SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9
Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9
TX Calibration Test, 3-72
tx fine adjust, E-1
TX Path Calibration, 3-66
Transmit TX path audit, 3-74
Transmit TX path calibration, 3-70
Troubleshooting
DC Power Problems, 6-24
RF path fault isolation, 6-12
Set span configuration, 6-36
span problems, 6-35
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-25
TX level accuracy fault isolation, 6-14
TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-2
UNIX, shut down on LMF, 5-4
Unshielded Twisted Pair. See UTP
Updating CDMA LMF Files, 5-1
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-21
Troubleshooting CSM Checklist, 6-18
TX
acceptance tests
code domain power/noise floor, 4-15
equipment setup, 4-3
pilot time offset, 4-13
spectral purity mask, 4-9
spectrum analyzer display, 4-11
waveform quality (rho), 4-12
all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-4
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-10, A-11
BLO test data sheets, A-8
level accuracy fault isolation, 6-14
output acceptance tests
code domain power noise, 4-7
pilot time offset, 4-7
waveform quality, 4-7
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-65
Verify
test equipment used, test data sheets, A-1
TX output, 4-3
Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-33
version Folder, 3-11
Virtual BTS, 1-15
Waveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,
4-12
When to optimize
BTS, B-1
inter–frame cabling, B-1
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-2
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-25
TX Audit Test, 3-75
TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipment
setup calibration, 3-61
08/01/2001
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-20
Xircom Model PE3–10B2
LMF to BTS connection, 3-21
remove from BTS, 5-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-7
PRELIMINARY
Index
– continued
Notes
Index-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS
Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
800 MHz and 1900 MHz
CDMA
English
08/01/2001
68P09253A60–1
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
800 MHz and 1900 MHz
CDMA
PRELIMINARY
08/01/2001
68P09253A60–1
English


---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2001:08:23 16:15:35-04:00
Create Date                     : 2001:08:23 16:14:55-04:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Page Count                      : 262

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools